leadership and administration
TRANSCRIPT
![Page 1: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
MCI 8101
MARINE CORPS INSTITUTE
STAFF NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS CAREER DISTANCE EDUCATION PROGRAM
LEADERSHIP AND ADMINISTRATION
MARINE BARRACKS WASHINGTON, DC
![Page 2: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 i Course Introduction
LEADERSHIP ANDADMINISTRATION (8101)
Course Introduction
Scope The responsibilities of SNCOs increase with every rank reached. As an NCO,
you will need continuing education on a variety of subjects to master these additional responsibilities. Technical and tactical proficiency is the hallmark of the Marine Gunnery Sergeant. This course covers a wide range of subjects that will enhance your abilities in maintaining the high standards expected of the senior non-commissioned officer ranks.
References The following references were used in the writing of this course:
• MCRP 6-11B w/ch1, Marine Corps Values: A User's Guide For
Discussion Leaders. • MCO P1070.12K w/ch1, Individual Records Admin Manual (IRAM). • MCCS, http://www.usmc.mccs.org. • Key Volunteer Network, HQ Bn. Volunteer Program, Henderson Hall. • Navy Marine Corps Relief Society, http://nmcrs.org. • Employee/ Member Self Service, http://emss.dfas.mil. • MCO 1740.13B, Family Care Plans. • Internal Revenue Service, IRS, http://www.irs.gov. • Volunteer Income Tax Assistance, VITA, Marine Barracks, Washington,
D.C. • United Service Organizations, USO, www.uso.org/ • Marine Corps Command Center, MCCC. HQMC. Arlington, VA. • Tricare, http://www.tricareonline.com/ • United Concordia, www.ucci.com. • American Red Cross, www.redcross.org. • DOD FMR Department of Defense Financial Management Regulations
• Navy Mutual Aid Association • www.navymutual.org • Navy Federal Credit Union
Continued on next page
![Page 3: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 ii Course Introduction
Course Introduction, Continued
References, continued
• MCO 6100.12, Marine Corps Physical Fitness Test and Body Composition Program Manual.
• MCO P1900.16F, Separation and Retirement Manual. • MCO 1080.35F, Personnel Reporting Instructions Manual. • MCO 5000.12D, Pregnancy and Parenthood. • MCO P10110.17C W/CH 1 & 2, Marine Corps Nutrition and Menu
Planning Manual. • NSCA, Quick Series Guide to Basic Weight Training Guide. • NSCA, Quick Series Guide to Performance Nutrition. • NSCA, Quick Series Guide to Aerobic Training. • MCO P1610.7E w/erratum and ch 1-8, Performance Evaluation System
(PES). • SECNAVINST 5210.11D, Department of the Navy File Maintenance.
Procedures and Standard Subject Identification Codes (SSIC). • SECNAVINST 5215.1C, Directives Issuance System. • SECNAVINST 5216.5D, Department of the Navy Correspondence Manual. • MCO 5210.11D, Records Management Program for the Marine Corps. • MCO 5215.1H, Marine Corps Directives. • MCO 5600.20M w/ch1, Marine Corps Warfighting Publications System. • MCO 5600.49, Marine Corps Doctrinal Proponency. • MCBUL 5600, i, canc: Nov 03. • UM-MCPDS 5605, Marine Corps Publications Distribution System
(MCPDS) Users Manual. • TBS Student Handout, B0142, The Marine Corps Directives System. • PERSONNEL ADMIN SCHOOL
• Lesson Plan A0301 Prepare File Folder • Lesson Plan A0302 Files Outline • Student Outline Directives
• Covey, Stephen R., The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People: Simon and Schuster, 1989.
• AR 25-50, Preparing and Managing Correspondence. • DA Pamphlet 600-67, i. • Effective Army Writing Subcourse Number IS1460 Edition A, Center for
Army Leadership, Command and General Staff College, Fort Leavenworth, Edition Date: June 1999.
Continued on next page
![Page 4: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 iii Course Introduction
Course Introduction, Continued
Table of Contents
The following is the table of contents for this course.
Study Unit Title Page
-- Course Introduction i 1 Introduction to Leadership 1-1 2 Proficiency and Conduct Marks 2-1 3 Evaluating Personal and Family Readiness 3-1 4 Financial Planning 4-1 5 Weight Control and Military Appearance 5-1 6 Personnel Records 6-1 7 Files, Directives, and Publications 7-1 8 Effective Communications 8-1 Review Lesson Exercise R-1
Estimated Study Time
You will spend about 21 hours, 40 minutes completing this course. This includes the time you will need to study the text, complete the exercises, and take the final examination.
Continued on next page
![Page 5: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 iv Course Introduction
Course Introduction, Continued
Reserve Retirement Credits
You earn 7 retirement credits for completing this course. You earn reserve retirement credits at the rate of one credit for each 3 hours of estimated study time. Note: Reserve retirement credits are not awarded for the MCI study you do
during drill periods if awarded credits for drill attendance.
Summary The table below summarizes all-important “gateways” needed to successfully
complete this course.
Step When you… Then you will… For more information…
1 Enroll in the program Receive your program material
Refer to the Program Introduction
2 Complete the self-paced text
Arrange to take the final examination
Refer to the Program Introduction
3 Pass the final examination
Receive a course completion certificate
Refer to the Program Introduction
![Page 6: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-1 Study Unit 1
STUDY UNIT 1
INTRODUCTION TO LEADERSHIP
Overview
Estimated Study Time
1 hour, 10 minutes
Unit Scope This study unit discusses the philosophy, foundation, and ethics of leadership.
It also outlines the differences in leadership styles. This unit then reviews the role of the staff noncommissioned officer (SNCO) relative to seniors and subordinates.
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you should be able to • Identify characteristics of leadership.
• Identify the role of the SNCO.
In This Study Unit
This study unit contains the following lessons:
Topic See Page
Lesson 1 Leadership Characteristics 1-3 Lesson 2 Role of Staff Noncommissioned Officers (SNCOs) 1-13
![Page 7: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-2 Study Unit 1
(This page intentionally left blank.)
![Page 8: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-3 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
LESSON 1
LEADERSHIP CHARACTERISTICS
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
20 minutes
Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the characteristics and foundations of leadership.
Leadership has two objectives: mission accomplishment and troop welfare. As a leader, you must have some tools to evaluate the climate of leadership in your unit.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify the four indicators of leadership.
• Identify the Marine Corps leadership traits.
• Identify the Marine Corps leadership principles.
• Identify the Marine Corps leadership styles.
Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 1-3 Leadership Indicators 1-4 Leadership Traits 1-5 Leadership Principles 1-7 Leadership Styles 1-9 Lesson 1 Exercise 1-10
![Page 9: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-4 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
Leadership Indicators
Four Indicators The four indicators of leadership are
• Morale • Esprit de corps • Discipline • Proficiency
Morale Morale is the individual’s state of mind. It depends on the Marine’s attitude
toward everything.
Esprit de Corps Factors that constitute morale are loyalty to, pride in, and enthusiasm for the
unit shown by its members. Whereas, morale refers to the Marine’s attitude, esprit de corps is the unit spirit.
Discipline Discipline is the individual or group attitude that ensures prompt obedience to
orders and the initiation of appropriate action in the absence of orders.
Proficiency Proficiency is the technical, tactical, and physical ability of the Marine and
the unit to perform the assigned mission.
![Page 10: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-5 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
Leadership Traits
Traits The Marine Corps recognizes 14 leadership traits:
• Bearing • Courage • Decisiveness • Dependability • Endurance • Enthusiasm • Initiative • Integrity • Judgment • Justice • Knowledge • Loyalty • Tact • Unselfishness
Bearing Bearing is presenting a favorable impression at all times in carriage,
appearance, and personal conduct.
Courage Courage is recognizing fear, danger, or criticism and despite them, proceeding
with calmness and firmness.
Decisiveness Decisiveness is the ability to promptly decide and to communicate your
decisions in a clear and forceful manner.
Dependability Dependability is the certainty of proper performance of duty.
Continued on next page
![Page 11: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-6 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
Leadership Traits, Continued
Endurance Endurance is mental and physical stamina measured by the ability to
withstand pain, fatigue, stress, and hardship.
Enthusiasm Enthusiasm is the display of sincere interest and exuberance in the
performance of duty.
Initiative Initiative is the ability to act in the absence of orders.
Integrity Integrity is characterized by uprightness of character, soundness of moral
principles, and honesty.
Judgment Judgment is the ability to weigh facts to reach sound decisions.
Justice Justice is rewarding and punishing according to the merits of the case in
question.
Knowledge Knowledge is the understanding of a science or an art and includes the
Marine’s range of information, professional knowledge, and understanding of your Marines.
Loyalty Loyalty is faithfulness to yourself, your peers, subordinates, and seniors and
to your unit, the Corps, and your country.
Tact Tact is the ability to deal with others without creating offense.
Unselfishness Unselfishness is characterized by avoiding to provide for your own comfort
and personal advancement at the expense of others.
![Page 12: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-7 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
Leadership Principles
Principles Leadership principles are the guidelines a leader uses when selecting
appropriate actions and orders. As a leader, you must use and reinforce these principles at all times. • Proficiency • Self-improvement • Caring for others • Communication • Example • Confirmation • Teamwork • Decisiveness • Developing subordinates • Knowing capabilities • Initiative and responsibility
Proficiency Be technically and tactically proficient. Leaders must know their job
thoroughly and have a wide range of knowledge.
Self-Improvement
Know yourself and seek self-improvement. Leaders must know their weaknesses and strengths and must continually strive to increase their technical and tactical knowledge.
Caring for Others
Know your Marines and look out for their welfare. Leaders must know their Marines both personally and professionally. Daily interaction gives some indication of how their subordinates will function in a combat environment.
Communication Keep your personnel informed. The Marine who is well informed about the
mission, situation, and purpose of a particular task is more effective than one who is not informed.
Continued on next page
![Page 13: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-8 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
Leadership Principles, Continued
Example Leaders must convey good examples to their Marines and actively display
integrity, courage, physical fitness, discipline, professional competence, good personal appearance, and exemplary personal conduct.
Confirmation Leaders must give clear and concise orders. Make sure the task is
understood, supervised, and accomplished. By proper supervision, leaders make sure their orders are properly carried out.
Teamwork Train your Marines as a team. Before participating in an operation, ensure
that your Marines know their job and then train them to work together as a team.
Decisiveness Make sound and timely decisions. The ability to make a rapid estimate of the
situation and to arrive at a sound decision is essential for all leaders.
Developing Subordinates
Develop a sense of responsibility among subordinates. Delegate authority and give your subordinates greater responsibilities.
Knowing Capabilities
Employ your command in line with its capabilities. Leaders must know the limitations and capabilities of their unit and employ it in accordance with those capabilities.
Initiative and Responsibility
Seek and take responsibility for your actions and the actions of your unit. As a leader, you must be willing to take the initiative and take on added responsibilities without receiving instructions from your superiors. Once you take this initiative, you are responsible for the failure or success of your unit.
![Page 14: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-9 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
Leadership Styles
Definition Leadership style is the leader’s behavioral pattern as perceived by the Marines
who the leader is attempting to influence, guide, or direct.
Continuum of Styles
Leadership styles fall along a continuum; this continuum depicts two extreme leadership approaches: • Autocratic - the leader makes all decisions for subordinates and tells them
what to do, how, when, where, etc. • Democratic - the leader allows subordinates to decide within general or
mission type guidelines set by the senior.
Variation Between these two extremes are variations. These leadership style variations
depend on how much authority and direction is either kept by the leader or is delegated to the subordinate. We can divide the continuum into four basic styles. • Telling - the leader makes the decision and announces it. • Selling - the leader presents decision and invites questions. • Participating - the leader presents problem, gets suggestions, and makes
decision. • Delegating - the leader defines limits and permits subordinates to make
decisions.
![Page 15: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-10 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 11 performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 Which of the following lists the four indicators of leadership?
a. Dedicated, competent, responsible, knowledgeable b. Competent, discipline, esprit de corps, knowledgeable c. Proficiency, morale, esprit de corps, discipline d. Proficiency, morale, leadership, decisiveness
Item 2 Esprit de corps is best described as
a. guidelines for leadership principles. b. a realistic approach to leadership. c. enthusiasm and loyalty to the unit. d. the projection of the leaders personality.
Items 3 Through 7
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the definition from column 2 that best describes the leadership trait in column 1. The answers in column 2 may not be used more than once. Column 1 Column 2 Leadership traits Definitions ___3. Bearing a. Action in the absence of orders ___4. Loyalty b. Faithfulness to country ___5. Initiative c. Favorable impressions ___6. Unselfishness d. Ability to reach sound decisions ___7. Judgment e. Avoiding to provide for your own comfort
Continued on next page
![Page 16: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-11 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 8 Keeping your personnel informed is which leadership principle?
a. Caring for others b. Developing subordinates c. Communication d. Confirmation
Item 9 Knowing your Marines and looking out for their welfare is which leadership
principle? a. Teamwork b. Caring for others c. Knowing capabilities d. Self-improvement
Item 10 Leadership style can be defined as the leader’s _____ pattern as _____ by the
Marine who the leader is attempting to influence, guide, or direct. a. physical, determined b. behavioral, perceived c. perception, acknowledged d. behavioral, determined
Item 11 The leader defines limits and permits subordinates to make decisions can be
described as which leadership style? a. Democratic b. Telling c. Autocratic d. Delegating
Continued on next page
![Page 17: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-12 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the correct answers to the exercise items. If you
have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 c 1-4 2 c 1-4 3 c 1-5 4 b 1-6 5 a 1-6 6 e 1-6 7 d 1-6 8 c 1-7 9 b 1-7 10 b 1-9 11 d 1-9
![Page 18: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-13 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
LESSON 2
ROLE OF STAFF NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS (SNCOS)
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope The SNCOs are frequently referred to as the backbone of the Marine Corps.
In many respects, this is true, for the SNCO handles most of the day-to-day, close supervision of the Marines in their platoons. This lesson describes the professionalism and ethics SNCOs demonstrate in the conduct of day-to-day operations with subordinates and seniors.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify the characteristics of a professional.
• Identify the documents in which the military code of ethics may appear.
• Identify proper conduct of day-to-day supervision of subordinates.
• Identify SNCO responsibilities to seniors.
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 1-13 Professionalism and Ethics 1-14 Responsibilities to Subordinates 1-16 Responsibilities to Senior SNCOs and Officers 1-20 Lesson 2 Exercise 1-21
![Page 19: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-14 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Professionalism and Ethics
Definition of a Professional
Military professionals are people who have undergone special preparation and training. They have the knowledge on which professional actions are based and the ability to apply that knowledge in a practical way. Their profession is a means of earning a living, but wages do not become the primary purpose of their work. The professional Marine must be competent, responsible, and dedicated.
Why Is Professionalism Important?
A Marine is a public servant who is responsible for the defense of the nation. A leader is responsible for the lives of their Marines. In combat, they may have to take risks, which endanger their lives to accomplish a mission. If leaders are careless and have not conditioned themselves and trained their followers to act professionally, a unit may suffer needless casualties. A Marine, like other members of the armed services, must follow a unique value system that sets them apart from the rest of society. This value system is based upon obedience, courage, discipline, selflessness, and honor.
Careerists Careerists are Marines who seek advancement for their own sake and who see
it exclusively as a goal rather than an opportunity to do something of greater value for their nation and the Marine Corps.
Occupation Versus Profession
Marines for whom being a Marine is an occupation rather than a profession are motivated by money instead of the nature of the profession and its associated responsibilities.
Continued on next page
![Page 20: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-15 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Professionalism and Ethics, Continued
Problems Careerists and Marines who view their position as an occupation are hurting
the professional image Marines have developed in more than 220 years of service to this country. These two types of Marines are harmful to unit readiness and the individual’s ability to perform in combat. Leaders must aggressively attack both problems by • Objectively evaluating subordinates and counseling them accordingly • Setting the example for subordinates and living a life according to the
military ethic • Continually emphasizing the important and essential function of Marines:
keeping the nation secure • Setting and enforcing standards that will not tolerate or support the actions
of careerists or those for whom being a Marine is just an occupation
Definition Ethics, generally interchangeable with morality, has been described as the
science that deals with conduct insofar as what is considered right or wrong, good or bad. Webster defines ethics as the principles of conduct governing an individual, profession, or group.
The Military Code of Ethics
The Marine Corps does not have a specific code written as one document. The Corps’ code or military ethic exists in many forms and documents. It is primarily the ethical practices that society accepts and the legal system supports. The following documents contain Marine Corps ethical practices: • Oath of Office • Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ) • Code of Conduct • Code of Ethics for Government Service
![Page 21: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-16 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Responsibilities to Subordinates
Set the Example
The SNCO is responsible for creating an environment that eliminates poor performance of duty. The SNCO should continuously set the standard and maintain an even temper. The phrase do as I say, not as I do simply does not work. SNCOs following such a philosophy only come across as hypocrites or phony to their subordinates. The best subordinates will ignore them; the worst subordinates will take license for their wrongdoings and multiply the problem. The SNCO exhibits and demands professionalism by • Knowing the boundaries of the SNCO position • Providing continuous training, instructions, and counseling • Supervising with an eye for matching subordinates with equivalent tasks • Encouraging initiative • Using the chain of command in two directions (up and down) • Demonstrating integrity and fairness when dealing with others
Boundaries In addition to setting the standard and the example, SNCOs must know the
boundaries of their positions. SNCOs should be sure they always work with seniors in a professional manner and clearly understand their own limits of position relative to their seniors. SNCOs will not issue orders for which they do not have the authority to enforce. By issuing an order without the authority to enforce it, the SNCO can lose a great deal of respect from subordinates and seniors when forced to withdraw the order. SNCOs must know what degree of authority has been granted to them and what they are allowed to use as rewards and incentives. If you do not have the authority to say when liberty is granted, when a person is going to be promoted, or when a Marine is going to be selected to perform a highly sought after task, be careful not to imply that you have this power. You should make it clear to your subordinates that you do not have this authority, but that your recommendations are generally accepted in these areas. When a subordinate has accomplished an especially creditable piece of work, make sure they get the proper reward in a timely fashion.
Continued on next page
![Page 22: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-17 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Responsibilities to Subordinates, Continued
Training, Instructions, and Counseling
SNCOs must mold subordinates by providing constructive training, clear instructions, and continuous counseling. These three elements are essential to improve subordinates’ performance of duty and growth. Training builds teamwork, confidence and enhances knowledge and skills. Clear instructions ensure that requirements are easily understood and completed. Counseling establishes communication with subordinates and provides detailed explanation of what is required and expected in the performance of duty standards.
Supervision The SNCO should observe all subordinates performing assigned duties and
evaluate subordinates daily to be sure they all are productive in their assignment. The SNCO can then make changes when necessary. Motivation and challenge are positive incentives to build and keep high morale in the ranks of subordinates. Therefore, do not place Marines in jobs for which they lack knowledge and skill or they will lose motivation. Nor should you place Marines in jobs for which their ability, knowledge, and skill far exceed the requirement to perform the job. Doing so removes the challenge and deteriorates motivation. The point is to match the Marine’s knowledge and skill with the required tasks to provide challenging, but attainable jobs to each Marine.
Initiative For subordinates to reach their maximum potential, they must have the
opportunity to exercise their skills. The NCOs, especially, must be given the opportunity to use their own initiative even though mistakes due to lack of knowledge and experience as well as errors in judgment may occur. SNCOs must provide opportunities for subordinates, NCOs in particular, to demonstrate initiative instead of doing the job for the subordinate.
Continued on next page
![Page 23: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-18 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Responsibilities to Subordinates, Continued
Chain of Command
For a Marine organization to work at maximum efficiency, the chain of command must operate in two directions: • Up – small problems can be brought to the attention of the command
without fear of consequences or a perception of seniors being unapproachable or uncaring.
• Down – information flows openly all the way from the top of the chain to
the bottom.
Environment SNCOs must conduct day-to-day operations in an environment that
• Encourages subordinates to seek advice and counsel. • Provides fair and impartial treatment. • Accepts subordinates’ suggestion for improved performance.
Integrity SNCOs should be as good as their word at all times and in any circumstances.
On many occasions, subordinates will try to get you to compromise your integrity. If you do so, they will be quick to take advantage of the situation and tempt you repeatedly. Eventually their true feelings of disrespect and contempt will appear. Once this occurs, it will be almost impossible for you to regain your self-respect and your authority over them. Your subordinates want you to do what is right, and they must know without a doubt that they can depend on you to be consistent with your words in all that you do.
Continued on next page
![Page 24: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-19 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Responsibilities to Subordinates, Continued
Fairness Fairness is another element necessary to build and maintain good leadership.
To relate to subordinates fairly, you must • Treat people justly. This does not mean that you treat all Marines alike.
Instead, you must study your subordinates carefully. When you are certain you have discovered all the factors that apply to the case, you apply an appropriate corrective action. That action must neither be too harsh nor too easy. It must be tailored to the situation and the individuals involved and still be fair to all parties involved.
• Handle mistakes appropriately. When a subordinate makes a mistake,
examine the incident to determine the seriousness and the actions of the individual Marine. If the Marine’s intentions were good and no signs indicate that the mistake was the result of laziness or indifference, the incident should be used as a training experience and not as an opportunity to chastise or belittle that Marine.
• Exercise the privileges of rank with respect and dignity. When you desire
respect from Marines, be sure you treat them with equal respect. Build up their self-respect. Overbearing and insulting treatment of subordinates are signs of cowardly leadership. Consideration, courtesy, and respect from leaders toward juniors are integral parts of discipline and good leadership.
![Page 25: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 1-20 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Responsibilities to Senior SNCOs and Officers
Senior-Subordinate Relationship
As with the information, responsibilities flow up and down the chain of command. SNCOs, senior SNCOs, and officers must establish a mutually supporting relationship. They must exhibit a large degree of trust, confidence, and professional camaraderie between themselves. When this exists, the strong points of each can be exploited for the good of the organization, and shortcomings can be minimized.
Advisory Role SNCOs at all levels must provide seniors with essential feedback and advice
concerning problems within the unit and help seniors by supervising and counseling enlisted personnel. If the SNCO withholds advice for any reason or the senior perceives that his position is being undermined, the command is prone to be negatively impacted.
Professional Bearing
If the SNCO and senior demonstrate any indication that they are not working closely together, the other members of the unit will quickly sense it and may try to play one person against the other to the detriment of all. You must develop a mature, professional relationship based on mutual respect and a regard for human dignity with your seniors. Above all, present subordinates with a united front in all matters of concern to the organization.
Support Leaders make decisions every day involving not only the service, but the
morale and welfare of their subordinates. To demonstrate support for leaders and successful mission accomplishment, SNCOs should express their • Understanding of the decision-making process • Understanding of their position in carrying out the senior’s policy • Enthusiasm when communicating the information down the chain.
![Page 26: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
MCI course 8101 1-21 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 A military professional must have which three characteristics?
a. Expertise, careerism, hard charging b. Careerism, occupationalist, enforcer c. Competent, responsible, dedicated d. Expertise, ethics, thoughtful
Item 2 Readiness and the individual’s ability to perform in combat is affected
negatively by a. careerism and professionalism. b. professionalism and occupationalism. c. careerism and occupationalism. d. selfishness and individualism.
Item 3 Which documents contain Military Code of Ethics?
a. UCMJ, Code of Conduct, Oath of Office b. DD214, FM 20-01, Military Leadership c. Profession of arms, philosophy of leadership, command management d. Civil disorders, combat training, conduct or inquiry
Continued on next page
![Page 27: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
MCI course 8101 1-22 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 4 SNCOs have the responsibility for molding subordinates into Marines.
Which of the following is a method that SNCOs use to mold their subordinate Marines? a. Promise of promotion b. Displaying anger c. Clear instructions d. Showing favoritism
Item 5 SNCOs must conduct day-to-day operations in an environment that
a. encourages subordinates to seek advice and counsel. b. clearly provides fair and impartial treatment. c. accepts subordinates’ suggestions for improved performance. d. all of the above.
Item 6 Which of the following describes the relationship between SNCO and senior?
a. Selfish and withholding b. Informal and familiar c. Supporting and trusting d. Constructive and assuming
Continued on next page
![Page 28: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
MCI course 8101 1-23 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 c 1-14 2 c 1-14 3 a 1-15 4 c 1-17 5 d 1-18 6 c 1-20
![Page 29: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
MCI course 8101 1-24 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
![Page 30: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-1 Study Unit 2
STUDY UNIT 2
PROFICIENCY AND CONDUCT MARKS
Overview
Estimated Study Time
50 minutes
Unit Scope This study unit introduces the Marine Corps counseling program. It also
discusses the procedures for advising Marines on recommending proficiency and conduct marks.
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you should be able to • Identify the references that apply to proficiency and conduct mark
assignment. • Identify standard of proficiency. • Identify the steps for recommending proficiency and conduct marks. • Identify standard of conduct.
In This Study Unit
This study unit contains the following lessons:
Topic See Page
Lesson 1 Evaluating Marines 2-3 Lesson 2 Standards for Proficiency and Conduct Marks 2-11
![Page 31: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-2 Study Unit 2
(This page intentionally left blank.)
![Page 32: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-3 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
LESSON 1
EVALUATING MARINES
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
15 minutes
Lesson Scope This lesson discusses proficiency and conduct marks that play a prominent
role in determining the type of discharge an enlisted Marine will receive. As an evaluation of our qualities and value to the Corps, comments and recommendations have significant impact in promotion, assignment, and career development. Therefore, it is imperative for any Marine in a leadership role to be able to recommend or write appropriate evaluations, and counsel other Marines concerning their performance. This lesson discusses the reference and occasions for assignment of proficiency and conduct marks for your Marines.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify the reference that contains information on proficiency and
conduct marks.
• Identify the occasions that require proficiency and conduct marks.
• Identify the effective dates for the occasions.
• Identify the occasion codes.
• Identify the filing instructions for occasions.
Continued on next page
![Page 33: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-4 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Introduction, Continued
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 2-3 Counseling and Guidance 2-5 Recommending Proficiency and Conduct Marks 2-6 Lesson 1 Exercise 2-8
![Page 34: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-5 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Counseling and Guidance
Who All Marines should be continuously counseled about their overall
performance of duty.
Why Counseling is an inherent part of leadership. It is also an opportunity to guide
those who have demonstrated the potential and desire for assignments of increased responsibility toward a career decision.
When Counseling should begin when Marines first join a unit, continue at frequent
intervals during their tour of duty, and terminate only upon detachment.
Initial Session During the initial counseling sessions, the reporting senior should ensure that
the Marine understands the nature and extent of their duties, standards of performance they are expected to achieve, and how the reporting senior will judge their performance.
Subsequent Sessions
In next sessions point out the degree to which the Marine has/has not met established performance standards and any noteworthy achievements or shortcomings to be corrected. All Marines have a vested interest in their standing among their peers and any suggestions or opportunities open to them for further career development.
Reference Guidelines for the assignment of proficiency and conduct marks are contained
in the MCO P1070.12_Individual Records Administration Manual (IRAM).
![Page 35: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-6 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Recommending Proficiency and Conduct Marks
Procedure The table below lists the steps for recommending proficiency and conduct
marks.
Step Action 1 Determine the Marine’s last proficiency and conduct marks. This
gives the evaluator a base to build on. 2 Look at the charts in the IRAM. Refer to counseling sheets on the
Marine within the marking period. 3 Recommend proper marks. 4 Counsel the Marine on the recommended marks. 5 Forward the recommended marks up the chain of command.
Note: The commanding officer has the final say on the proficiency and
conduct marks the Marine actually receives.
Occasions The following table lists the occasions for submitting proficiency and conduct
marks on regular and reserve Marines. The table also contains the codes for each occasion.
Occasion Regular
Code Reserve
Code Transfer TR TR Temporary Disability Retired List (TDRL) DL DL Discharge DC DC Promotion to Corporal or Sergeant PR PR Reduction RD RD Declared Deserter (first day of UA period) DD --- Last Day Prior to Declaring Deserter PD --- To TAD TD --- TAD Complete TC --- Change of Primary Duty CD CD Service School Completion SC SC Semiannual (reported 31 January and 31 July) SA --- Annual (reported on 31 December) --- AN Completion of Annual Training --- AT Recommended (see MCO P1400.32) RE RE Active Duty Special Work (ADSW) --- RT
Continued on next page
![Page 36: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-7 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Recommending Proficiency and Conduct Marks, Continued
Filing Occasions
The table below lists different situations where an occasion will take precedence over another.
If… Then…
The effective date for transfer coincides with the requirement to report semiannual marks
Transfer marks take precedence
The Marine attends annual training within 90 days of the effective date for reporting annual marks
Report annual marks
The Marine receives a mark for any other occasion within 90 days of the effective date for reporting annual marks
Report annual marks of Not Applicable
The effective date for annual marks coincides with any reporting occasion other than promotion or transfer
Annual marks take precedence
![Page 37: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-8 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 8 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 Which reference contains guidelines and standards for assignment of conduct
and proficiency marks? a. MCO P1080.35 Personnel Reporting Instruction Manual (PRIM) b. MCO P1070.12 Individual Records Administration Manual (IRAM) c. MCO 1610.11 Performance Evaluations, appeals Manual (PEAM) d. MCO P1400.29 Marine Corps Promotion Manual (MARCORPROMAN)
Item 2 Which of the following are occasions for submitting proficiency and conduct
marks? a. TAD 60 days or more and promotion b. Enlistment and discharge c. Company NJP and reduction d. Completion of service school and discharge
Item 3 What are the effective dates when assigning semiannual proficiency and
conduct marks for regular Marines? a. 31 January and 31 July b. 1 January and 1 December c. 1 July and 1 December d. 1 October and 1 April
Continued on next page
![Page 38: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-9 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 4 What is the regular and reserve code for transfer?
a. TRAN b. TR c. TF d. TD
Items 5 Through 8
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the filing instruction from column 2 that best matches the occasion in column 1. The answers in column 2 may not be used more than once. Column 1 Column 2 Occasion Filing Instruction ___5. If the effective date for transfer coin- a. Report annual marks cides with the requirement to report b. Annual marks take semi-annual marks precedence ___6. If the Marine attends annual training c. Transfer marks take within 90 days of the effective date for precedence reporting annual marks d. Report annual marks of ___7. If the Marine receives a mark for any Not Applicable other occasion within 90 days of the effective date for reporting annual marks ___8. If the effective date for annual marks coincides with any reporting occasion other than promotion or transfer
Continued on next page
![Page 39: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-10 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 b 2-5 2 d 2-6 3 a 2-6 4 b 2-6 5 c 2-7 6 a 2-7 7 d 2-7 8 b 2-7
![Page 40: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-11 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
LESSON 2
STANDARDS FOR PROFICIENCY AND CONDUCT MARKS
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
15 minutes
Lesson Scope This lesson will provide guidelines that are necessary to properly evaluate
Marines on proficiency and conduct. The IRAM sets the qualities and standards for recommending these marks. However, the commanding officer has the discretion to assign marks outside of these standards.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify the qualities used to evaluate a Marine’s proficiency.
• Identify the qualities used to evaluate a Marine’s conduct.
• Identify the standards for proficiency and conduct and its corresponding
adjective rating.
In This Lesson The table below lists the topics covered in this lesson.
Topic See Page Introduction 2-11 Proficiency Marks 2-12 Conduct Marks 2-14 Lesson 2 Exercise 2-17
![Page 41: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-12 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Proficiency Marks
Qualities When recommending proficiency marks, all attributes of the Marine should
be considered. • Mission accomplishment • Leadership • Intellect and wisdom • Individual character • Physical fitness • Personal appearance
Education Completion of professional military education, Marine Corps Institute
courses, and off-duty education are evaluated and incorporated into the duty proficiency mark. Proper allowance should be made when a Marine is filling a billet inconsistent with the Marine’s grade.
Evaluation Marks
For an honorable discharge, the Marine must display proficiency marks averaging at least 3.0. Any mark below 3.0 not supported by documentation of a court-martial or non-judicial punishment requires an entry in the Administrative Remarks of the Service Record Book, page 11.
Continued on next page
![Page 42: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-13 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Proficiency Marks, Continued
Standards The table below, guidelines from MCO P1070.12_ Individual Records
Administration Manual (IRAM), lists the recommended proficiency marks and their corresponding adjective ratings.
Mark Corresponding
Adjective Rating
Standard of Proficiency
0 to 1.9 Unacceptable
• Does unacceptable work in most duties • Generally undependable • Needs considerable assistance and close
supervision on even the simplest assignment
2 to 2.9 Unsatisfactory
• Does acceptable work in some duties but not dependable
• Needs assistance and close supervision on all but the simplest assignments
3 to 3.9 Below Average • Handles routine matters acceptably • Needs close supervision when performing
duties not of a routine nature
4 to 4.4 Average
• Dependable in doing regular duties thoroughly and competently
• Usually needs assistance in dealing with problems not of a routine nature
4.5 to 4.8 Excellent • Does excellent work in all regular duties
but needs assistance in dealing with extremely difficult or unusual assignments
4.9 to 5.0 Outstanding
• Does superior work in all duties • Extremely difficult or unusual
assignments given with full confidence the job will be thoroughly and competently completed
![Page 43: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-14 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Conduct Marks
Qualities When recommending conduct marks, the evaluator must consider these
qualities: • Bearing • Attitude • Interest • Reliability • Courtesy • Cooperation • Obedience • Adaptability • Participation • Physical fitness • Moral fitness • Influence on others
Evaluation Marks
For an honorable discharge, the Marine must display conduct marks averaging at least 4.0. Any mark below 4.0 not supported by documentation of a court-martial or non-judicial punishment requires an entry in the Administrative Remarks of the Service Record Book, page 11.
Continued on next page
![Page 44: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-15 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Conduct Marks, Continued
Standards The table below, guidelines from MCO P1070.12_ Individual Records
Administration Manual (IRAM), lists the recommended conduct marks and their corresponding adjective ratings.
Mark Corresponding
Adjective Rating
Standard of Conduct
0 to 1.9 Unacceptable
• Habitual offender • Convicted by general, special, or more
than one summary court-martial • Given a mark of “0” upon declaration of
desertion • Ordered to confinement pursuant to
sentence of court-martial • Two or more punitive reductions in grade
2.0 to 2.9 Unsatisfactory
• No special court-martial • Not more than one summary court-
martial • Not more than one nonjudicial
punishment • One punitive reduction in grade
3 to 3.9 Below average
• No court-martial • Not more than one nonjudicial
punishment • No favorable impressions of the qualities
listed on 2-14 • Failure to make satisfactory progress
while assigned to weight control or military appearance
• Conduct such as not to impair appreciably one’s usefulness or the efficiency of the command, but conduct not sufficient to merit an honorable discharge
Continued on next page
![Page 45: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 2-16 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Conduct Marks, Continued
Standards, continued
Mark Corresponding
Adjective Rating
Standard of Conduct
4 to 4.4 Average
• No offenses • No unfavorable impressions as to
attitude, interest, cooperation, obedience, after-effects of intemperance, courtesy and consideration, and observance of regulations
4.5 to 4.8 Excellent
• No offenses • Positive favorable impressions of the
qualities listed on 2-14 • Demonstrates reliability, good influence,
sobriety, obedience, and industry
4.9 to 5.0 Outstanding
• No offenses • Exhibits to an outstanding degree the
qualities listed on 2-14 • Observes spirit as well as letter of orders
and regulations • Demonstrated positive effect on others
by example and persuasion
![Page 46: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
MCI course 8101 2-17 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 4 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 Which of the following qualities are considered when recommending
proficiency marks? a. Timeliness and leadership b. Physical fitness and leadership c. Trustworthiness and participation d. Bearing and mission accomplishment
Item 2 Which of the following qualities are considered when recommending conduct
marks? a. Influence on others and interest b. Adaptability and know how c. Cooperation and personal appearance d. Individual character and leadership
Continued on next page
![Page 47: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
MCI course 8101 2-18 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 3 Scenario: Lance Corporal White handles routine matters acceptably, but in
your opinion, he has not performed to the best of his abilities. He gets the job done; however, both you and the squad leader have often found it necessary to supervise him closely when he is assigned a task, which is not routine. You have encouraged him to take correspondence courses, but to date he has not enrolled himself. Several times during the past 5 months, you have been obliged to counsel him for leaving on liberty when his squad was not squared away. He has received one valid letter of indebtedness from a local merchant during this marking period. He keeps himself in good physical condition. Of your three squad leaders, he is the least effective. Considering this information, which corresponding adjective ratings for proficiency and conduct marks are appropriate? a. Unsatisfactory and unsatisfactory b. Below average and average c. Below average and below average d. Average and unsatisfactory
Item 4 Scenario: Corporal Black is a real “take-charge” individual. He readily
assumes responsibility and uses his authority wisely. He requires only a general outline of what is to be accomplished, then goes out, and completes the assigned task in an expeditious, efficient manner. You have relied heavily on Corporal Black’s ability to instruct in general military subjects. Since making corporal, he has taken two MCI courses, the Marine NCO and the Marine Rifle Platoon. He completed both of these courses with high final grades. His squad usually represents the best appearance and usually is the best in the field, at inspections, and in drill. The members in his squad never create disciplinary problems for you. He keeps himself at the peak of physical condition and ensures that his squad does likewise. His personal appearance and habits are above reproach. Considering this information, which corresponding adjective ratings for proficiency and conduct marks are appropriate? a. Excellent and average b. Outstanding and outstanding c. Average and average d. Excellent and outstanding
Continued on next page
![Page 48: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
MCI course 8101 2-19 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 b 2-12 2 a 2-14 3 c 2-13,2-15 4 b 2-13,2-16
![Page 49: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
MCI course 8101 2-20 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
![Page 50: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-1 Study Unit 3
STUDY UNIT 3
EVALUATING PERSONAL AND FAMILY READINESS
Overview
Estimated Study Time
2 hours, 20 minutes
Unit Scope This study unit is designed to give you an understanding of how to evaluate
personal and family readiness.
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you should be able to • Identify actions to take to prepare a Marine and their spouse for a
deployment. • Identify the actions a Marine and their spouse can take to maintain
readiness during a deployment. • List helpful tips for a Marine returning from a deployment.
In This Study Unit
This study unit contains the following lessons:
Topic See Page
Lesson 1 Predeployment 3-3 Lesson 2 During Deployment 3-35 Lesson 3 Return and Reunion 3-67
![Page 51: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-2 Study Unit 3
(This page intentionally left blank.)
![Page 52: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-3 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
LESSON 1
PREDEPLOYMENT
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
45 minutes
Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the measures a Marine and their spouse should take to
prepare them before the Marine leaves for a deployment.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify family readiness. • State where a Marine can go to obtain information about financial
planning. • Identify the means in which a spouse can contact a Marine in an
emergency while away from their spouse. • Identify who is responsible for a family care plan. • Identify what type of legal planning a Marine should do before a
deployment. • Identify the emotional factors that play in a deployment. • Identify how children can be affected by a deployment.
Continued on next page
![Page 53: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-4 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Introduction, Continued
In this lesson This lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 3-3 Family Readiness 3-5 Financial Planning 3-6 Communication 3-11 Family Care Plan 3-16 Legal Planning 3-17 Emotional Planning 3-24 Myths of Deployment 3-26 Children and Deployment 3-27 Lesson 1 Exercise 3-31
![Page 54: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-5 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Family Readiness
Definition Family readiness is defined as families who are prepared and equipped with
the skills and tools to successfully meet the challenges of the military lifestyle. A successful deployment for the Marine and family requires readiness through planning and advanced preparation.
Importance Similar to the unit making preparations for their deployment, many steps must
be taken by the Marine to ensure his/her family can continue efficiently during his/her absence. Gathering information is but the first step. A successful deployment requires good communication and an understanding of the roles each family member will play during this time.
Support Many organizations are a part of the support structure available to the Marine
and family preparing for a deployment. The installation Marine Corps Community Services (MCCS) can provide information, guidance, and support during the preparation stage and for the family during the deployment. The MCCS web site, (http://www.usmc-mccs.org) also displays information on applicable support programs and links to other military support sites. The unit Key Volunteer Network (KVN), Navy Marine Corps Relief Society (NMCRS), and the American Red Cross are great resources for Marine families as are the chaplain and his/her staff.
![Page 55: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-6 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Financial Planning
Working out a Plan
The Marine and spouse should review family financial procedures and ensure all financial matters are resolved prior to departure. There should be a good understanding of the roles and responsibilities of each spouse concerning allocation of pay, payment of bills, and a household budget. The Financial Specialist with your installation Marine Corps Community Services Personal Services Financial Management Program, the Navy Marine Corps Relief Society, and many credit unions and banks can provide assistance with budget planning. Each unit has a command financial specialist. The Marine should ensure the family has enough money each pay period for basic living expenses such as rent, food, and utilities.
Direct Deposit Distribution
Direct Deposit to a joint account can lead to confusion and problems if both spouses are writing checks and making withdrawals on the same account. Bounced checks and letters of indebtedness can result. Most banks will set up separate accounts and distribute the direct deposit funds between the accounts as requested. Transfer of funds between accounts can easily be made if one person falls short of cash. Contact your bank or credit union for more information regarding direct deposit.
Type “D” Allotment
The Marine can initiate an allotment to family members to cover basic living expenses. All or part of a Marine’s basic pay or BAH can be allotted.
Type “S” Allotment
Savings allotment to a joint account can allow the spouse to draw out the needed amount of money.
How to Start/Stop an Allotment
Only the Marine, not the spouse, can start, stop, or change an allotment. Should an allotment need to be changed, the Marine can change it through the unit G-1 (S-1 or Admin Office) or via the E/MSS (Employee/Member Self Service, website: http://emss.dfas.mil, phone: 1-877-363-3677 in CONUS). The LES (Leave and Earnings Statement) can also be viewed on the E/MSS website with a user p.i.n (personal identification number). It can take up to 45 days (three pay periods) for implementation of an allotment. Once the Marine is deployed there can be a 60-day lag.
Continued on next page
![Page 56: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-7 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Financial Planning, Continued
Quantity of Allotment
A Marine may allot part or all of his/her pay, with the exception of COMRATS (commuted rations) and clothing allowance. When individuals start an allotment, it is wise to have money set aside, particularly if allotting a large amount of total pay. The money for an allotment is taken out of both checks, the 1st and 15th of the month. The first allotment check is issued on the first of the following month. If there is a pressing need for the funds when an allotment is started or delayed, Navy Marine Corps Relief Society (NMCRS) can often assist with an interest-free loan until the money arrives. A Marine can sign a pre-authorization form at NMCRS to enable his/her family members to receive assistance. If the family member is not pre-authorized, permission via Red Cross message can be a long process. A General Power of Attorney can also be used as authorization for assistance from NMCRS.
Split Pay This option allows Marines enrolled in the direct deposit program to receive a
portion of their pay at their duty locality each payday. This requested split pay amount must be a whole dollar amount less than or equal to the Marine’s normal pay. The remainder of pay will be transmitted to the Marine’s financial institution.
Family Separation Allowance (FSA)
All deployed Marines with family members are eligible for Family Separation Allowance (FSA) $100.00 per month. This allowance will be reported on day 31 of the deployment. It can take several paychecks before the money is received, but it will be dated back to include payment from the first day of deployment to the end of deployment. There are reasons that can cause termination of the allowance such as extended social or permanent visits of family members.
Rations Basic Allowance for Subsistence (BAS) (sometimes referred to as
COMRATS or Pro/Sep Rations) is a continuous entitlement for all Marines. Enlisted Marines will have deduction for meals taken from their pay account when they are issued a meal card or being provided with meals, such as MREs when in the field. The amount deducted is slightly less than the full BAS for each day. As with FSA, it can take several pay periods for the initial deduction to occur, but the full amount will be deducted at some point.
Continued on next page
![Page 57: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-8 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Financial Planning, Continued
Temporary Additional Duty (TAD)
All personnel will receive temporary additional duty pay while deployed for over 30 days or more than 50 miles away. The amount varies with rank and deployment site.
Basic Allowance for Housing (BAH)
Basic Allowance for Housing (BAH) payment or stay in base housing will continue through the deployment.
Additional Pay Entitlements
Other possible additions to pay are imminent danger pay, COLA (Cost of Living Allowance), flight deck duty pay, and sea pay. Specific pay issues will be dependent upon the type, length, and location of the deployment.
Safeguarding Keep all important documents safeguarded from potential destruction of fire
or theft.
Continued on next page
![Page 58: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-9 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Financial Planning, Continued
Family Budget Plan
The following is a good form to use when finding your family budget.
MONTHLY EXPENSES ********(List here monthly expenses which are not paid by allotment)*********
PAYMENT FOR PAY TO 1ST PAYDAY 15TH PAYDAY HOUSING _______________ $___________ $____________ FOOD _______________ $___________ $____________ ELECTRIC _______________ $___________ $____________ WATER _______________ $___________ $____________ CLOTHING _______________ $___________ $____________ GASOLINE _______________ $___________ $____________ TELEPHONE _______________ $___________ $____________ HOUSEHOLD _______________ $___________ $____________ SUPPLIES SCHOOL SUPPLIES _____________ $___________ $____________ (LUNCHES, ETC.) CAR LOAN (1) _______________ $___________ $____________ CAR LOAN (2) _______________ $___________ $____________ OTHER LOANS _______________ $___________ $____________ _______________ $___________ $____________ _______________ $___________ $____________ ENTERTAINMENT _____________ $___________ $____________ CREDIT CARDS _______________ $___________ $____________ _______________ $___________ $____________ _______________ $___________ $____________ POSTAGE/MAILING $___________ $____________ INSURANCE: LIFE ________________________ $___________ $____________ HOMEOWNER’S _______________ $___________ $____________ VEHICLE _____________________ $___________ $____________ OTHER EXPENSES (SPECIFY) ___________________________ $____________ $____________ ___________________________ $____________ $____________ ___________________________ $____________ $____________ TOTAL EXPENSES NOT PAID BY ALLOTMENT $_____________ $___________
Continued on next page
![Page 59: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-10 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Financial Planning, Continued
Family Budget Plan, continued
********(List here monthly expenses paid by allotment)***********
PAYMENT FOR PAY TO AMOUNT 1ST PAYDAY 15TH PAYDAY ALLOTMENT FOR___________ $______________ $_____________ ALLOTMENT FOR___________ $______________ $_____________ ALLOTMENT FOR___________ $______________ $_____________ ALLOTMENT FOR___________ $______________ $_____________ ALLOTMENT FOR___________ $______________ $_____________ TOTAL EXPENSES PAID BY ALLOTMENT $______________ (+) $_____________
(=) $___________________ TOTAL EXPENSES NOT PAID BY ALLOTMENT $____________ (+) $__________ *(See previous page for amounts.)
(=) $___________________ TOTAL MONTHLY EXPENSES (=) $___________________ *(Add total expenses not paid by allotment with total expenses paid by allotment to arrive at total monthly expenses).
MONTHLY INCOME
SERVICE MEMBER’S BASE MONTHLY PAY $____________________ BASIC ALLOWANCE FOR SUBSISTENCE (BAS) (+) $____________________ BASIC ALLOWANCE FOR HOUSING (BAH) (+) $____________________ CLOTHING ALLOWANCE (+) $____________________ FAMILY SEPARATION ALLOWANCE (FSA) (+) $____________________ OTHER ALLOWANCE(S) (+) $____________________ TOTAL MONTHLY PAY/ALLOWANCES (+) $____________________ TOTAL MONTHLY DEDUCTIONS (ALLOTMENTS, ETC.) (-) $ ____________________ NET MONTHLY PAY (=) $___________________ SPOUSE'S MONTHLY PAY (+) $___________________ OTHER INCOME (+) $___________________ TOTAL MONTHLY FAMILY INCOME (=) $__________________ TOTAL MONTHLY EXPENSES (NON-ALLOTMENT) (-) $__________________ REMAINING (Net) MONTHLY FAMILY INCOME (=) $_________________
![Page 60: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-11 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Communication
Emergency Family members can contact their Marines to inform them of family
emergencies (i.e., death, illness, or injury) through • The Command via the Key Volunteer Network • Local Red Cross Chapter or Station during normal working hours or at
the Chapter emergency number • American Red Cross Armed Forces Emergency Services toll free in the
United States at 1-877-272-7337 • Duty Officer of the Installation or Officer of the Day
Casualty A Casualty Assistance Calls Officer (CACO) notifies the next of kin in the
event of serious injury, illness, or death of a Marine. A uniformed Marine representative will make notification in person. In most cases a Chaplain will accompany the CACO. This may not be possible in some cases such as in a Marine Corps Reserve unit or when next of kin do not reside near an installation.
Routine The Key Volunteer Network provides official communication within the unit.
Any official message will be passed via the Key Volunteer phone tree, verbatim from the Commander, or his/her designee to each family. Official messages may include schedules for return dates and port calls, changes in those schedules, mishap reports, etc. All Marine Expeditionary Units (MEUs) have official web sites accessible through http://www.usmc.mil; some will have telephone numbers with automated update messages. Unit family readiness personnel will provide details and information about these services at the unit predeployment briefs.
Continued on next page
![Page 61: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-12 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Communication, Continued
Spouses Emergency Data Sheet
The following is a form for the spouse to complete that will indicate her/his preferences in the event of an emergency. This form should be kept with the spouse.
EMERGENCY DATA FORM Today’s Date:
Your Name: Home Phone:
Address:
City, State, Zip:
Your Employer and Address:
Work phone: Work Days: Work Hours:
Volunteer organizations you work with, their phone numbers, and the days/hours you volunteer:
CHILDREN
Name: DOB: School:
Name: DOB: School:
Name: DOB: School:
Name: DOB: School:
Who is authorized to pick up your children?
Name: Phone:
Address:
Continued on next page
![Page 62: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-13 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Communication, Continued
Spouses Emergency Data Sheet, continued
Do they have power of attorney if your child needs medical treatment? Yes: No:
Sitter’s Name: Phone:
Doctor’s Name: Phone:
Spouses Name / Rank:
Specific office / workplace: SSN:
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY INVOLVING YOUR SPOUSE
Name of a friend or relative you would like with you:
Name: Phone:
Name of clergyman you would like with you:
Do you want your parents notified? Yes: No: By Whom:
In order of preference, please list local friends you would like notified
Would you want these people notified personally? Yes: No:
Name #1: Phone:
Address:
Name #2: Phone:
Address:
Name #3 Phone:
Address:
In case of an emergency involving your spouse, please give us any information you think might be relevant.
In order of preference, who should care for your children? (If name, address and phone number were not listed earlier in the form, please include this information. Also, please indicate if these people have power of attorney for medical treatment.)
Are these people aware you have given their names to care for your children? Yes: No:
Continued on next page
![Page 63: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-14 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Communication, Continued
Spouses Emergency Data Sheet, continued
Do you have any pets that need to be cared for if something were to happen to you or your spouse?
Yes: No: Pet’s Name:
Please indicate who you would like to care for your pet.
Name: Phone:
Address: Any special instructions for feeding, walking, etc.
Is the pet on any medications? No: Yes: If yes, give details:
I give my permission allowing the Key Volunteer Coordinator or the Key Volunteer Advisor to utilize this information should an emergency occur involving my spouse or involving myself when my spouse is away. Signature: Date:
YOUR PARENTS OR CLOSEST RELATIVE
Name #1: Relationship:
Address: Home Phone:
City, State, Zip: Work Phone:
Name #2: Relationship:
Address: Home Phone:
City, State, Zip: Work Phone:
SPOUSE’S PARENTS OR CLOSEST RELATIVE
Name #1: Relationship:
Address: Home phone:
City, State, Zip: Work phone:
Name #2: Relationship:
Address: Home phone:
City, State, Zip: Work phone:
Continued on next page
![Page 64: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-15 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Communication, Continued
Spouses Emergency Data Sheet, continued
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Special needs, health problems involving you, your spouse or your children, allergies, pregnant, etc.
WRITE DIRECTIONS OR DRAW A DETAILED MAP
In the space provided below, give clear directions to your house so that we can find you in case of an emergency.
![Page 65: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-16 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Family Care Plan
Responsibility A Family Care Plan is the responsibility of Marines who are single parents;
dual military couples; Marines who otherwise bear sole responsibility for the care of minor children; or Marines with family members who are unable to care for themselves in the Marine’s absence.
Guidance A Family Care Plan provides guidance and procedures to the person(s) who
provide care for the Marine’s children, disabled, elderly, and/or other family member(s) in the absence of the Marine due to military duty (training exercises, temporary duty, deployments, etc.). The plan outlines the legal, health care (medical and dental), logistical, educational, monetary, and religious arrangements for the care of the Marine’s family member(s) or ward to include Wills, Power(s) of Attorney, Certificates of Guardianship or Escort, family contacts, Special Letters of Instruction, and any other documentation reasonably necessary for the caregiver’s use.
In Absence of Marine
The plan must be sufficiently detailed and systematic to provide for a smooth, rapid transfer of responsibilities to the caregiver upon the absence of the Marine. Marine Corps Order 1740.13B provides guidance for Family Care Plans. The Plan must be reviewed for accuracy and validity each year and is a part of the Marine’s service record. Family Care Plans for those Marines who are required to have them are also included as a part of the unit family readiness program.
![Page 66: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-17 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Legal Planning
Available Services
Services available at the Legal Assistance Office are free. They include, but are not limited to, general estate planning, wills, insurance review and general property matters. Advice is available on such matters as credit purchasing, state and federal taxation, state motor vehicle laws, landlord-tenant relationships, laws involving domestic issues (divorce, adoption, etc.), state residency matters, immigration laws and commercial contract laws. Check with your installation Legal Assistance Office for information specific to your area.
Limitations The Marine lawyers cannot represent clients in civilian court, but they can
advise and assist active duty and retired service members that have personal legal problems. The Legal Assistance Officer is required to treat all such problems confidentially and may not lawfully be ordered to disclose such information by any superior authority. When a legal problem is not within the scope of the Legal Assistance Program, referral can be made to local civilian counsel.
Action Act immediately when a legal issue is discovered. Immediate action will
often resolve small problems before they become more serious. For example, the best time to ask questions is before signing a contract rather than when the terms of the contract come into dispute. Never sign a blank contract!! Utilization of Legal Assistance services is both advised and encouraged when a legal problem is first identified.
Powers of Attorney
One of the most important matters to consider during predeployment planning is a Power of Attorney. A Legal Assistance officer should be contacted to help you prepare one.
Continued on next page
![Page 67: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-18 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Legal Planning, Continued
General Power of Attorney
A General Power of Attorney allows the holder of that legal document the right to sell personal property and to use the grantor’s credit. A General Power of Attorney grants virtually unlimited ability to act for another person. General Powers of Attorney often create more difficulties than they cure and are generally not advised. It is an extremely powerful legal instrument and can be a dangerous instrument in the hands of someone inexperienced in business matters, a person of unstable temperament, or a spouse when the marriage relationship is in a state of discord. A General Power of Attorney should not be executed unless the individual making it is fully aware of the risks associated with such a document. Always consider whether a Special Power of Attorney would serve the immediate purpose.
Special Power of Attorney
A Special Power of Attorney allows the holder of that legal document to act for the grantor only when conducting business that is delineated in the document. This power of attorney will list in writing the actions you want conducted on your behalf. A Special Power of Attorney can be very useful for such matters as moving of household goods, settling insurance claims, and managing financial accounts or funds not jointly held. Care should be taken in determining who will hold the power of attorney and what actions will be authorized in the document. Remember without the power of attorney, the spouse at home could be significantly hampered in dealing with matters that may arise during deployment
Wills This document is very important for every Marine, particularly those with
family members. The primary purpose of a will is to ensure that minor children are cared for and property distributed as the writer desires. Without a will, state laws decide how personal property is distributed and, if there are children involved, they can become wards of the state. The state’s wishes generally do not follow those of the deceased. It is important that an individual’s will reflect his/her current state of affairs so keeping it up to date is critical. Overlooking the execution of this important document could directly affect the security of your family. Your banking institution or a responsible adult should be named executor of your will. A will does not cover life insurance distribution. Insurance is a separate contract between the insured and the insurance company. Verify that your beneficiary designations on insurance policies are accurate and current.
Continued on next page
![Page 68: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-19 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Legal Planning, Continued
In Loco Parentis
This phrase means standing in place of parents. If children are in the care of someone other than a parent or legal guardian, that person is considered in “loco parentis.” Some states will appoint children as wards of the state when the parents are injured and/or unconscious unless there is an original notarized document authorizing a specific person to act as guardian. It is possible that children in the care of someone other than the legal guardians or parents will not be seen for medical emergencies without the original notarized form. A separate form must be filled out and notarized for every person caring for the child or children. For more information, DEERS dependency information is available from the MCCS web site at http://www.usmc-mccs.org/.
Notarization Notary public service is available at the Legal Assistance Office, most banks
and credit unions, and usually through Marine Corps Community Services. There may be a small fee for the service depending upon where it is obtained.
Taxes Federal and state tax returns (when required) must be filed even though the
service member is deployed, unless an extension is granted. Problems in preparing and submitting tax forms or improper tax assessment may be directed to the Legal Assistance Office. Marine Corps installations will normally have a VITA (Volunteer Income Tax Assistance) office to assist with preparing a return. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) refund check will generally require the signatures of both parties in a joint filed form. Electronic filing will require payment via direct deposit to joint account. A special power of attorney is recommended to facilitate filing and access to refunds. The required filing time period for Federal income tax is between January 1 and April 15 of the year following the taxable year.
Filing Taxes Outside the United States
If you are outside the continental United States (CONUS) on April 15th you have until June 15th to file provided you are on official orders, not on leave. You can extend the June 15th filing date up two more months after your return to CONUS if you file an IRS Form 4868 prior to June 15th. Detailed information may be obtained from the IRS toll free at 1-800-829-1040.
Continued on next page
![Page 69: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-20 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Legal Planning, Continued
Record of Personal Affairs
The following sample will provide a gathering of all personal information that will be helpful during the deployment.
RECORD OF PERSONAL AFFAIRS
LAST NAME, FIRST NAME, MIDDLE INITIAL SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER RANK, BRANCH OF SERVICE, ORGANIZATION/UNIT COMPLETE LOCAL ADDRESS, TOWN, COUNTY, STATE, ZIP COMPLETE PERMANENT ADDRESS, TOWN, COUNTY, STATE, ZIP PERSONAL DATA 1. BIRTH: (MONTH, DAY, YEAR, TOWN, COUNTY, AND STATE) 2. NATURALIZATION: 3. PARENTS: FATHER (NAME & ADDRESS) MOTHER (NAME & ADDRESS) 4. MARRIAGE: WIFE: HUSBAND: WHERE & WHEN: 5. CHILDREN: FULL NAMES, PLACE, AND DATE OF BIRTH 6. PERSONAL LAWYERS OR TRUSTED FRIEND WHO MAY BE CONSULTED REGARDING MY
PERSONAL OR BUSINESS AFFAIRS 7. DEPENDENTS OTHER THAN SPOUSE AND CHILDREN LOCATION OF FAMILY RECORDS 1. BIRTH CERTIFICATES: WIFE: HUSBAND: CHILD: CHILD: CHILD: 2. NATURALIZATION PAPERS: WIFE: HUSBAND: CHILD: CHILD: CHILD: 3. CERTIFICATES: MARRIAGE: DIVORCE PAPERS: DEATH CERTIFICATES: ADOPTION PAPERS:
Continued on next page
![Page 70: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-21 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Legal Planning, Continued
Record of Personal Affairs, continued
MILITARY SERVICE PAPERS OTHER IMPORTANT PAPERS 1. WILL: NAME: RESIDENT OF WITNESSES: EXECUTOR'S NAME: SUBSTITUTE EXECUTOR: 2. POWER OF ATTORNEY: AGENT: INCOME TAX: FEDERAL RETURNS: STATE RETURNS: CITY: PERSONAL PROPERTY: INSURANCE 1. LIFE: INSURANCE CO: POLICY NO: PAYMENT AMT: INSURANCE CO: POLICY NO: PAYMENT AMT: INSURANCE CO: POLICY NO: PAYMENT AMT: 2. HOMEOWNERS/RENTERS/PROPERTY:
DEDUCTIBLES, EFFECTIVE DATES: 3. AUTO:
CITY/COUNTY/STATE REGISTRATION: INSPECTION CERTIFICATES: AUTO CLUB/TOWING SERVICE:
4. MEDICAL, LIABILITY, OR OTHER INSURANCE: SOCIAL SECURITY 1. SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER: HUSBAND: CARD/STUB LOCATED AT: WIFE: CARD/STUB LOCATED AT: CHILD: CARD/STUB LOCATED AT: CHILD: CARD/STUB LOCATED AT: CHILD: CARD/STUB LOCATED AT:
2. LOCATION OF UP-TO-DATE EMPLOYMENT RECORDS: PROPERTY OWNERSHIP OR INTEREST HEREIN 1. REAL ESTATE HOLDINGS: LOCATED: THE PROPERTY IS ENCUMBERED BY A: HELD BY: TAXES PAID THROUGH (YEAR):
2. OTHER PERSONAL PROPERTY:
Continued on next page
![Page 71: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-22 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Legal Planning, Continued
Record of Personal Affairs, continued
BANK ACCOUNTS 1. CHECKING: 2. SAVINGS: 3. OTHER (SPECIFY): SAFE DEPOSIT BOX 1. BANK/TRUST COMPANY: 2. LOCATED AT: STOCKS BONDS & SECURITIES 1. LOCATED AT: 2. BENEFICIARY: 3. LIST OF WAR OR SAVINGS BONDS BY DENOMINATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS: DESIGNATED BENEFICIARY NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF PERSONS DESIGNATED ON SERVICEMAN'S OFFICIAL RECORD OF EMERGENCY DATA FORM TO RECEIVE SETTLEMENT OF UNPAID EARNINGS AND ALLOWANCES IN THE EVENT OF HIS DEATH: DEBTS AND PAYMENTS FOR EACH ITEM INCLUDE
• CREDIT AGENCY, STORE, OR BANK: • AMOUNT DUE: • DATE OF MONTHLY PAYMENT:
ENTER ANY ADDITIONAL DATA REGARDING INSURANCE, ALLOTMENTS, MILITARY Y RECORDS, INSTRUCTIONS TO FAMILY MEMBERS, VETERANS ADMINISTRATION CLAIM NUMBER, ANY OTHER SERVICE NUMBER, ETC.
Continued on next page
![Page 72: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-23 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Legal Planning, Continued
Record of Personal Affairs continued
HOUSEHOLD: (NOTE WARRANTY INFORMATION ALSO) 1. APPLIANCES
a. WASHER: MAKE: MODEL: PURCHASED WHERE WHEN: IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
b. DRYER: MAKE: MODEL: PURCHASED WHERE WHEN: IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE) c. REFRIGERATOR: MAKE: MODEL: PURCHASED WHERE WHEN: IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
c. OTHER APPLIANCES: MAKE: MODEL: PURCHASED WHERE WHEN: IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE) 2. ELECTRONICS
a. TELEVISION: MAKE: MODEL: PURCHASED WHERE WHEN: IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
b. STEREO: MAKE: MODEL: PURCHASED WHERE WHEN: IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
c. COMPUTER: MAKE: MODEL: PURCHASED WHERE WHEN: IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
d. OTHER ELECTRONICS: MAKE: MODEL: PURCHASED WHERE WHEN: IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
3. AUTOMOBILE(S) AND OTHER VEHICLES a. VEHICLE #1: MAKE: MODEL: PURCHASED WHERE: WHEN: IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE) b. VEHICLE #2: MAKE: MODEL: PURCHASED WHERE: WHEN: IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
d. VEHICLE #3: MAKE: MODEL: PURCHASED WHERE: WHEN: IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE) 2. TROUBLE CALLS
a. PLUMBER: NAME: ADDRESS: PHONE:
b. ELECTRICIAN: NAME: ADDRESS: PHONE:
c. HEATING/AC: NAME: ADDRESS: PHONE: d. MECHANIC NAME: ADDRESS: PHONE:
![Page 73: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-24 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Emotional Planning
Communication is the Key
Often, family members don’t talk about deployments because the possibility of separation makes them feel uncomfortable. Honest discussion is usually the best way to deal with anxiety and minimize potential problems. Agree how often you will write and what type of information will be shared. Discuss alternate ways to communicate such as email, video and cassette tapes, letters and phone calls. It is a good idea to plan in advance for length and frequency of phone calls. Establishing a few ground rules and making a list of the “need to know” items before a call will help to keep phone bills under control. Plan ways to keep the connection with relatives and decide who will write/send gifts to parents and other family members for special occasions.
Varied Feelings Couples preparing for deployment and separation go through many emotions.
At first, they may feel excited. Later, they may start to withdraw from each other in an attempt to deal with powerful feelings. After separation and reunion, they may be disappointed that things did not go as they hoped. Intense feelings are normal. Recognize your feelings and expectations and talk to your partner about them.
Coping with Feelings
Have special photos taken of you and your family together and of your spouse or loved one alone. Give your special someone a keepsake for the deployment that will act as an emotional tie to keep you connected when you feel a since of loneliness. Be romantic before the deployment and create special moments to cherish. Recognize that many couples argue right before a deployment. Talking about your feelings ahead of time can help minimize this.
Continued on next page
![Page 74: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-25 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Emotional Planning, Continued
Plan Ahead Try to anticipate what will happen after deployment and separation. Plan
how to handle practical problems. For example, decide what to do if the furnace or car breaks down. Discuss how you want to share bad news. Try to write about solutions and plans, not focusing on the problems. For the spouse at home, once you find a comfortable routine, stay with it. Many people find that routine and ritual can be comforting. Identify your support systems: • Key Volunteer Network • Family • Friends • Navy Marine Corps Relief Society • Place of worship
Plan Special Days
Discuss and plan how you will spend the day of departure as well as starting homecoming plans that can be discussed and refined throughout the separation. Indicate special events, birthdays, and school activities on a calendar and duplicate so that each spouse has a copy. For special occasions, cards can be purchased and flowers and gifts can be ordered in advance for family members at home. Discuss special items the deploying spouse wants and needs and develop a list of suggestions for care packages.
The Shock Be prepared for a shock. No matter how well you prepare for separation, no
matter how much you talk it through, when the day finally arrives, you will still feel surprised that it is really happening.
![Page 75: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-26 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Myths of Deployment
Deployment Many people assume that one “gets used to” separation, and therefore, each
deployment and separation is less difficult and hurtful. The first deployment requires the greatest adaption because everything is new. The next several deployments are somewhat easier because of lessons learned. However, if the deployment cycle is frequent and continuous, families find that the effect is cumulative and the strain is great. Knowing that there are others with the same feelings and experiences during this time may make you feel less alone.
Return and Reunion
After the service member returns home, you cannot pick up right where you left off before the deployment. Each partner has been changed by the experience and the physical, mental, financial, and emotional challenges they have faced. A wife and husband are different after separation and must learn to be flexible as they adapt to each other’s and the children’s growth.
Illnesses Some of your friends and even your doctor may think all of your illnesses
suffered during deployment are a figment of your imagination or due to your spouse’s absence. Many spouses feel there is a tendency by doctors to attribute very real pain or illness to the absence of the deployed partner. Their suffering may be inaccurately diagnosed as childish attention-getting behavior. Stress can bring on medical problems and it is important to have those addressed.
![Page 76: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-27 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Children and Deployment
Dealing with Deployment
A deployment can be emotionally challenging for those left behind, especially children. Although children’s reactions will vary with their personalities, ages and coping skills, changes of the magnitude of a deployment will almost always be puzzling to children.
Before Deployment
Make sure children know they are loved unconditionally. Often young children see themselves as the cause of separation. Make sure children know this isn’t the case. Spend time with each child individually before leaving. Suggestions for dealing with young children include: • Be truthful, children can sense when they are being lied to. • Let children know it’s Okay to talk about feelings, even negative ones. • Tell children when you are leaving and how long you will be gone. • If possible, give the children a tour of the place you’re going. • Ensure that each child is left with a picture of the deploying parent. • Visit your child’s school before deployment and talk with the teacher(s).
During Deployment
Suggestions for dealing with your children while on deployment may include: • Maintain routines; regular mealtimes and bedtimes can help children
cope. • Don’t let the separation mean a free rein, discipline consistently. • Let children know they are making a valuable contribution by doing their
chores. • Families find it helpful to mark days off a calendar till the return of a
Marine. • Encourage each child to send their own letters and pictures to parent. • Constantly talk about the deployed parent in daily conversations. • Post a large world map and help the children track where the parent is.
Continued on next page
![Page 77: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-28 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Children and Deployment, Continued
Return and Reunion
Suggestions for dealing with your children for the return of the deployed Marine may include: • Returning parents need to remember it’s hard for children to get use to
having them back around. • Be patient; let your children know how much you love them. • Be prepared for the adjustment period, for both parents towards the child. • Returning parent should remember not to disturb a family set up. • If there is a new baby that has arrived since the beginning of the
deployment, returning parents should introduce themselves slowly.
Infants (Birth-12 Months)
The following are some examples of what you may see for infants: • Changes in eating and sleeping patterns • May want to be held more • May seem fussier than usual
Toddlers (Ages 1 to 3 Years)
The following are some examples of what you may see for toddlers: • Show regression in walking or potty training • Cry for no apparent reason • Whine and cling to you
Continued on next page
![Page 78: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-29 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Children and Deployment, Continued
Pre-School/Kinder-garden Age
The following are some examples of what you may see for pre-school children: • Clinging to people or favorite toy/blanket • Unexplained crying or tearfulness • Increased acts of anger or frustration • Sleep difficulties, nightmares, frequent waking • Worry about the safety of everyone • Loss of appetite • Fear of new people or situations
School Age The following are some examples of what you may see for school age
children: • Change in school performance • Increase in complaints of headaches, stomachaches, or other illnesses
when nothing seems physically wrong • More irritable or crabby • Fascination with the military and news about it • Worry about family and finances
Adolescents The following are some examples of what you may see for adolescents:
• Any of the aforementioned signs • Acting out behaviors such as getting into trouble at school, at home, or
with the law • Low self-esteem and self-criticism • Misdirected anger • Loss of interest in usual hobbies or activities
Continued on next page
![Page 79: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-30 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Children and Deployment, Continued
Relationship Children who have a good relationship with parents usually cope well with
separation. They have an understanding of the parent’s job and why deployment is an important part of it.
The Key Frequent and dependable communication between the deployed parent and
the family plays a key role in a child’s security and ability to cope with separation. All children adjust differently to deployment.
![Page 80: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-31 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 7 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 A family who is prepared and equipped with the skills and tools to
successfully meet the challenges of the military lifestyle is defined as a. family preparedness. b. family readiness. c. Marine Corps values. d. key family planning.
Item 2 Where should a Marine go to obtain information about financial planning?
a. The commanding officer b. The Marines platoon sergeant c. Many credit unions and banks d. Any financial institution
Item 3 Which of the following is a means of contacting the Marine in an emergency
while they’re away on deployment? a. Email b. Letter mail c. MARS d. Local Red Cross Chapter
Continued on next page
![Page 81: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-32 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 4 Who is responsible for a family care plan?
a. Individual Marine b. Platoon sergeant c. Platoon commander d. Company commander
Item 5 What type of planning should a Marine do before a deployment?
a. Legal planning b. Sensible planning c. Corrective planning d. Mandatory planning
Item 6 What is the key emotional factor when planning for a deployment?
a. Money problems b. Communication c. Shock d. Loneliness
Item 7 What are some of the examples of how a pre-school child may be affected by
a parent being absent due to a deployment? a. Misdirected anger b. Worry about family and finances c. Eating difficulties d. Low self-esteem
Continued on next page
![Page 82: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-33 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 b 3-5 2 c 3-6 3 d 3-11 4 a 3-16 5 a 3-17 6 d 3-24 7 c 3-29
![Page 83: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-34 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
![Page 84: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 3-35 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2
LESSON 2
DURING DEPLOYMENT
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
45 minutes
Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the principles involved in evaluating personal and
family readiness while a Marine is on deployment.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify tips in communication during a deployment. • Identify the dental benefits you and your spouse have available. • Identify key family organizations afforded to Marines and their spouses. • Identify measures taken to ensure operational and personal security for
Marines and their spouses. • Identify who is authorized to grant emergency leave for more than 60
days. • State the documents required when traveling and taking leave overseas. • Explain the general regulations dealing with government housing.
Continued on next page
![Page 85: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-1 Study Unit 4
STUDY UNIT 4
ADVISING MARINES ON FINANCIAL PLANNING
Overview
Estimated Study Time
2 hours, 10 minutes
Unit Scope The key to sound financial planning of personal finances depends on you
knowing your income and planning your expenditures accordingly. You should establish a sound financial system according to your own particular needs and circumstances. This study unit will give you the basic tools and the confidence to plan your financial success.
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you should be able to • Identify your current financial status. • Identify your financial goals and establish a financial plan. • Identify the tools that will help you to reach your financial goals.
In This Study Unit
This study unit contains the following lessons.
Topic See Page
Lesson 1 Financial Status 4-3 Lesson 2 Establishing A Financial Plan 4-13 Lesson 3 Achieving Financial Goals 4-27
![Page 86: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-2 Study Unit 4
(This page intentionally left blank.)
![Page 87: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-3 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
LESSON 1
FINANCIAL STATUS
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
20 minutes
Lesson Scope Regardless of age, gender, and ethnicity, you should establish a sound
financial system according to your particular needs and circumstances. This lesson will teach you the fundamentals for determining your current financial status and defining your budget limits.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify how a lender will compute debt-to-income ratio. • List the basic elements to determine debt-to-income ratio. • Identify the information necessary to set up a budget.
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.
Topic See Page Introduction 4-3 Debt-to-Income Ratio 4-4 Setting-Up a Budget 4-7 Lesson 1 Exercise 4-11
![Page 88: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-4 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Debt-to-Income Ratio
Definition One way a lender determines how much debt you can handle is to compute
your debt-to-income ratio. This involves measuring your current obligations against your current income. The industry standard is that no more than 37 percent of your income should be required to meet your debt obligations.
Worksheet The following table is a debt-to-income ratio worksheet. Use the table to
determine your debt-to-income ratio. Fill in relevant data as it is gathered and write in calculations and/or decisions directly on the sheet itself.
Step Action Calculation
1 Write in your current monthly gross income. $ 2 Multiply the amount in step 1 by .37 (the industry standard
for manageable debt). x .37
3 Write the result of the calculation. This is the portion of monthly gross income available for debt payments.
$
4 Write in your monthly rent or mortgage payment. $ 5 Write in your monthly car payment. $ 6 Write in your total minimum monthly payments on all
installment loans. $
7 Write in your total minimum monthly payments on all credit cards.
$
8 Add steps 4 through 7 to get your total monthly payments. $ 9 Write in 37% of your monthly gross (Step 3). $ 10 Write in the answer from step 8 and subtract from step 9. $ 11 Write the result here. This is the amount available for
additional monthly debt payment. $
Continued on next page
![Page 89: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-5 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Debt-to-Income Ratio, Continued
Worksheet The worksheet below is an example of what it would be like when it is filled
out.
Step Action Calculation
1 Write in your current monthly gross income. $4,205.00 2 Multiply the amount in step 1 by .37 (the industry standard
for manageable debt). x .37
3 Write the result of the calculation. This is the portion of monthly gross income available for debt payments.
$1,555.85
4 Write in your monthly rent or mortgage payment. $850.00 5 Write in your monthly car payment. $350.00 6 Write in your total minimum monthly payments on all
installment loans. $120.00
7 Write in your total minimum monthly payments on all credit cards.
$35.00
8 Add steps 4 through 7 to get your total monthly payments. $1,355.00 9 Write in 37% of your monthly gross (Step 3). $1,555.85 10 Subtract the total monthly payments (Step 8). $1,355.00 11 Write the result here. This is the amount available for
additional monthly debt payment. $200.85
Continued on next page
![Page 90: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-6 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Debt-to-Income Ratio, Continued
Application Ask your lender how much your minimum monthly payment will be for the
supplemental loan you are considering. If that amount is larger than the amount remaining at the end of Step 11, you and your lender may have reason to be concerned about your ability to manage the additional debt.
![Page 91: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-7 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Setting Up a Budget
Definition A budget is a master plan for sound financial management. Your budget
helps you set goals for spending and saving your money. Budgeting actually brings you face-to-face with reality and makes you think about alternatives in spending.
Budget Worksheet
A budget worksheet lists three elements: • Net income. List all monthly sources of income. Be sure you use your net
pay (income minus social security, taxes, etc.). Do not use gross pay. • Fixed expenses. List those expenses that are the same or almost the same
every month. These expenses are rent, utilities, car payments, and insurance, etc. Not paying these bills would cause legal problems.
• Variable expenses. List those expenses that vary from month-to-month.
Variable expenses allow you to make changes that will balance your budget. Such expenses are food, clothing, travel, entertainment, etc.
Continued on next page
![Page 92: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-8 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Setting Up a Budget, Continued
Sample Budget Worksheet
Listed below is a sample budget worksheet.
Category Monetary Record Total
Net Income Record the total of all sources of income minus social security, taxes, etc. to get the total net income.
$
Fixed Expenses Record the amount you spend each month on each item. Add them together to get your total monthly fixed expenses.
$ 1,096
• Rent/mortgage $ 525 • Utilities
• Gas $ 34 • Electric $ 101 • Water $ 18
• Telephone $ 45 • Automobile payment $ 310 • Furniture/appliance $ 38 • Other (identify and list each
separately) Cable TV $ 25
Variable Expenses Record the amount you spend each week on each item. Add everything together to get your total monthly variable expenses.
$ 799
Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4
Monthly Total
• Food $ 75 $ 48 $ 43 $ 39 $ 205 • Auto expenses $ 21 $ 30 $ 29 $ 25 $ 105 • Clothing $ 49 $ 12 $ 21 $ 16 $ 98 • Necessities $ 28 $ 12 $ 37 $ 23 $ 100 • Entertainment $ 25 $ 10 $ 16 $ 40 $ 91 • Savings $ $ 100 $ $ 100 $ 200 • Other (identify and list each
separately) $ $ $ $ $
Continued on next page
![Page 93: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-9 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Setting Up a Budget, Continued
Determining Expenditure Percentage of Income
Use the following table to determine the percentage of income you are spending on each expense category. To compute the percentage, divide the amount you spend on that item by your net income.
Monthly Expenditure Computation
(Total amount spent divided by net income)
Percentage of Income
Clothing Food (Groceries and eating out)
Housing (Rent/mortgage, utilities, telephone)
Medical Savings/Investment Transportation (Automobile payment, gas, maintenance)
Other
Expenditure Percentages Per Person
The following expenditure table shows the average percentage of income that should be spent for one person on each item.
Expenditure Percentage of Income
Clothing 5% Food 15% Housing 30% Medical 5% Savings/Investment 5% to 10% Transportation 15% to 20% Other 15%
Comparison Compare the percentages you spend with the average percentages to see
where you might be overspending and where you can cut back to add to your savings.
Continued on next page
![Page 94: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-10 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Setting Up a Budget, Continued
Accurate Records
Part of planning your budget is to get realistic figures. The key to proper budgeting is keeping complete and accurate records that considers all known and foreseeable expenses. You can identify your monthly expenses by keeping an accurate record of your income and expenses for at least three consecutive months.
![Page 95: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-11 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 3 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 How would a lender compute your debt-to-income ratio?
a. The lender would measure your current monthly expenditure against your
current percentage of income. b. The lender would measure your current debt against your current credit
report. c. The lender would measure your current obligations against your current
income. d. The lender would measure your current fixed expenses against your
current variable expenses.
Item 2 Which of the following lists the three basic elements used to set up a budget?
a. Classification expenses, net income, and variable expenses b. Fixed expenses, expenditures, and net income c. Net income, fixed expenses, and variable expenses d. Expenditures, taxes, and net income
Item 3 The key to proper budgeting is keeping
a. complete and accurate records. b. percentages per person. c. record of income. d. debt-to-income ratio.
Continued on next page
![Page 96: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-12 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 c 4-4 2 c 4-7 3 a 4-10
![Page 97: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-13 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
LESSON 2
ESTABLISHING A FINANCIAL PLAN
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
45 minutes
Lesson Scope A financial plan is like a road map. First you find out where you are. Then
you find the best way to get where you want to go. This lesson will teach you to identify your financial goals and determine the role credit plays in your financial status.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify the three terms for financial goals. • Match definitions of various credit terminology. • Identify credit advantages. • Identify credit disadvantages. • List guidelines for using credit wisely.
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 4-13 Financial Goals 4-14 Achieving Financial Goals 4-16 Definitions 4-18 Types of Credit 4-20 Using Credit 4-21 Lesson 2 Exercise 4-23
![Page 98: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-14 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Financial Goals
Short-Term Short-term financial goals are the building blocks for attaining long-term
financial security. Short-term goals are the small steps taken that will eventually lead you to the long-term objective. Three critical short-term financial goals are to • Obtain employment (get an income) • Establish a budget (determine your expenses) • Plan to save money (savings are key to financial planning)
Mid-Term Once you have obtained the three basic short-term goals (getting an income,
determining your expenses, and planning to save money), you can strive to reach mid-term financial goals. Mid-term financial goals include • Saving for emergencies • Taking a trip or vacation • Purchasing major necessary items (a car, major appliance, etc.) or luxury or
unnecessary items (jewelry, new television, stereo, etc.) In addition, mid-term goals are the means by which you strive to reach long-term goals: • Establish credit to enable you to purchase necessary items and manage
financial budget • Invest to increase savings through stocks, mutual funds, and individual
retirement accounts • Purchase insurance to prepare for emergencies and care for your loved ones
in the event of your death
Continued on next page
![Page 99: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-15 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Financial Goals, Continued
Long-Term Long-term financial goals are things you hope to achieve. Some long-term
financial objectives are to • Purchase a home • Purchase a new car • Establish a business • Attend college (yourself or your children) • Afford an active retirement
![Page 100: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-16 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Achieving Financial Goals
Work Backwards
Suppose your long-term objective was to buy a house. What steps would you take to reach that goal? That is, what would be your short-term objectives? One way to uncover these short-term goals is to work backwards. Thinking backwards in terms of time, what do you need to consider? These become your short-term goals. The table below is an example of working backward from the long-term objective of buying a house to the short-term objective of enrolling in courses or training.
Stage Description
1 You would need savings (a healthy bank account) to buy a house. 2 How would you get a healthy bank account? 3 You would have to get a steady job with a steady income. 4 How would you get a steady job with a steady income? 5 You would have to get education/training/certification/skills. 6 What is the first step toward getting qualified? 7 Take a realistic look at your abilities and background with a career
planner. 8 After you evaluated your abilities and background against careers,
what would be your next step? 9 Enroll in courses or training.
Plan You do not need a crystal ball to plan for your future. You must always be
guided by your plans and be prepared to adjust. Take time to figure out the details as much as possible. Remember, whenever you do not have enough money, extend your timeframe for obtaining a goal.
Commit Once you have made realistic plans, then commit yourself to fulfilling them.
Your decision is directly related to the degree of success that you will have reaching your goals. Your commitment is the edge you need to succeed!
Continued on next page
![Page 101: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-17 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Achieving Financial Goals, Continued
Reviewing Financial planning is an on-going process. You should review your income,
expenditures, short-, mid-, and long-term goals frequently. Your life situation may affect your financial planning. Review your financial plans when you experience a life-changing event such as • Changing jobs • Promotions • Attending college • Getting married • Having a child • Inheriting substantial items of value Remember, your goals can be achieved if you plan, commit, review, and adjust. However, without a financial plan, you are trusting luck to provide for your future and success.
![Page 102: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-18 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Definitions
Credit Credit means, "buy now pay later." Credit permits you to purchase goods or
services as you need them, but pay for them over time. Uses range from credit card shopping to arranging loans from financial institutions for very expensive items. Borrowing with credit is so popular in today's society that many of us could not imagine a world without credit--a world in which we would have to wait until we had saved the cash for such things as going to school or buying furniture, automobiles, houses, or other items. Our national and global economies are very dependent upon the availability of credit to consumers. Lenders extend credit because, in return, they expect the original loan amount plus a finance charge for the use of the money. The amount of credit you can obtain depends on your net worth, your income, and your credit rating.
Credit Line A credit line is the amount of credit a lender will extend to you. For example,
a new credit card may come with a credit line of $1,000.
Credit Rating Your credit rating or credit history is a summary of your bill-paying behavior
over a number of years. All creditors may submit bill-paying information to a credit agency. The credit agency then produces a credit report. Whenever you apply for credit, the lender can access your credit report. If you are denied credit, you should be able to obtain a copy of the credit report the lender saw. You can pay to obtain a copy of your credit report from credit agencies. You should periodically review your credit report to be sure the information is accurate. If it is not, contact the credit agency immediately and provide the information necessary to clear up discrepancies.
Continued on next page
![Page 103: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-19 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Definitions, Continued
Principle The principle is the original loan amount. Interest is calculated on the
principle.
Interest Interest is a charge for a financial loan, usually a percentage of the amount
loaned. When using credit to make a purchase, always add the interest costs to determine the true cost of what you are purchasing.
Finance Charge The finance charge is usually expressed as interest. The finance charge is a
percentage of the original loan amount (the principle).
Annual Percentage Rate (APR)
The annual percentage rate (APR) indicates the actual cost of a loan per year. It combines the interest charged and any fees. When comparing the cost of loans, compare the annual percentage rate of each loan.
![Page 104: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-20 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Types of Credit
Installment Installment credit allows a buyer to pay for a purchased item in regular
installments, usually monthly payments. Since the goods purchased are used as security for the loan, the seller owns the goods until all payments are made.
Open-End Open-end credit is when you promise to repay the full balance owed each
month so no finance charge is added. Of course, if you do not pay the bill in full when it is due, you will suffer credit problems. Some credit situations that are open-end credit are: • Credit cards, such as American Express or Diner's Club • Utility and telephone bills • Medical bills
Revolving Revolving credit is a line of credit that may be used over and over again.
With a revolving credit agreement, you have the option of paying the balance in full each month or making a minimum payment. Although some loan institutions provide revolving credit accounts, the most common form of revolving credit are credit cards such as: • Visa • MasterCard • Most department store charge accounts
![Page 105: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-21 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Using Credit
Advantages The advantages of using credit are, that credit
• Is convenient • May be used to meet emergencies • Helps you establish a credit rating • Provides better service on a purchase • Provides quicker receipt of an item • Allows you to take advantage of bargains (Remember it is only a bargain if
you need the item and you do not pay more in interest than you save on the item.).
Disadvantages The two main disadvantages to using credit are that you
• Pay extra in interest • May make unnecessary purchases because it is so easy to use
Continued on next page
![Page 106: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-22 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Using Credit, Continued
Guidelines If you decide to use credit, follow the guidelines in the table below to use it
wisely.
Guideline Action Shop around Find the lowest interest rate. Evaluate the purchase and pay cash • Consider paying cash.
• Delay the purchase; maybe the investment is not really necessary right now.
• Save up and purchase it when you have the money to pay cash.
Be sure the purchase is a wise investment
• Research to be sure your purchase is a wise investment.
• Do not purchase items on credit
that will be outdated or worn out before you finish paying for it.
Put as much down as you can The larger your down payment, the lower your payments will be or the fewer number of months you must make payments, or both.
Set a monthly credit limit • Set monthly credit spending limits. • Make sure the payment will fit into
your budget. Reduce debt • Always try to reduce debt.
• Resist the temptation to keep
buying the most you can on credit! • Try to pay off debt in advance and
then save the amount in your budget allotted to credit payments.
![Page 107: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-23 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
15 minutes
Directions Complete the following items. Check your answers against those listed at the
end of this lesson. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Items 1 Through 5
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the type of financial goal in column 2 that best identifies the financial transaction identified in column 1. You may use the answers in column 2 more than once.
Column 1 Financial Transaction
Column 2 Financial Goal
___ 1. Taking a trip or vacation ___ 2. Purchasing a home ___ 3. Obtaining employment ___ 4. Establishing a budget ___ 5. Establishing a business
a. Short-term b. Mid-term c. Long-term
Continued on next page
![Page 108: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-24 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Items 6 Through 9
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the credit term in column 2 that is defined in column 1. You may use the answers in column 2 only once.
Column 1 Definition
Column 2 Credit Term
___ 6. Actual cost of a loan per year
___ 7. Amount of credit a lender will extend to you
___ 8. The original loan amount ___ 9. Summary of your bill-
paying behavior over several years
a. Credit Line b. Principle c. Annual Percentage Rate d. Credit e. Credit Rating
Item 10 What are two major disadvantages of using credit?
a. Paying extra in interest and make unnecessary purchases b. Complicates your bookkeeping, and becomes easy to make mistakes in
computation c. Is expensive to write a lot of checks and mail a lot of checks d. Pay a higher interest and pay an additional charge for using credit
Item 11 What is an advantage of using credit?
a. Allows you to pay a high interest on your purchases b. Helps you establish a credit rating c. Helps you get more into financial debt d. It can be used against you if payment is not made
Continued on next page
![Page 109: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-25 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 12 Use the five credit guidelines listed below to answer the following question.
• Shop around. • Evaluate the purchase and pay cash. • Be sure the purchase is a wise investment. • Put as much down as you can. • Set a monthly credit . What is the sixth guideline? a. Reduce debt. b. Consolidate your loans into one big loan with one credit payment per
month. c. Use credit to save your cash and postpone paying. d. Renegotiate new and longer terms for credit loans.
![Page 110: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-26 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, continued
Answers The table below provides the correct answers to the exercise items. If you
have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 b 4-14 2 c 4-15 3 a 4-14 4 a 4-14 5 c 4-15 6 c 4-19 7 a 4-18 8 b 4-18 9 e 4-18 10 a 4-21 11 b 4-21 12 a 4-22
![Page 111: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-27 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
LESSON 3
ACHIEVING FINANCIAL GOALS
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope Having a financial plan is essential, but a commitment to saving is the key to
your plan. A key part to successful saving is starting early. The earlier you start, the bigger the payoff will be down the road. The principle vehicle that actually takes you to your financial goal or destination is saving. Savings enable you to achieve your personal financial objectives and provide you and your family with a financial security blanket. This lesson will teach you about some saving tools to help you reach your financial goals. Specifically, this lesson will explain the uses of a savings account, information about individual retirement accounts, and insurance you can purchase to help provide financial security for your future.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Determine how to start a savings account. • Identify the three types of individual retirement accounts (IRAs). • Identify criteria for using an IRA. • Identify the different types of life insurance. • Identify the criteria for choosing the best life insurance policy. • Identify the three methods to determine the amount of insurance needed.
Continued on next page
![Page 112: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-28 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Introduction, Continued
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 4-27 Selecting a Financial Institution 4-29 Open a Savings Account 4-30 Using Your Savings Account 4-31 Individual Retirement Account 4-32 Setting Up an IRA 4-34 IRA Withdrawals 4-36 Thrift Savings Plan 4-37 Insurance 4-40 Types of Insurance 4-41 Comparison Between Whole and Term Life Insurance 4-45 Choosing the Best Policy 4-46 Determining the Amount of Insurance You Need 4-47 Multiple Earnings Approach 4-48 Needs Approach 4-49 Needs Approach Worksheet 4-50 Common Sense Approach 4-58 Common Sense Approach Worksheet 4-59 Lesson 3 Exercise 4-61
![Page 113: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-29 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Selecting a Financial Institution
Three Factors to Consider
The first thing you must do to open a savings account is to select a bank. Your decision on which bank to use should depend on the bank’s • Location and service • Interest rate • Insurance as a financial institution
Location and Service
Obviously, you will want to choose a bank that has • Branches that are convenient for you • Functional services • Evening and weekend hours • Automated teller machines (ATMs) • Loans • Checking accounts • Savings accounts • Safety deposit boxes
Interest Rate An interest rate is the rate of money you get or the percentage amount the
bank pays you for keeping your money. You want to find a bank with the highest interest rate. The higher your interest rates, the more money you make on your saved money.
Financial Insurance
Lastly, you want to choose a bank that is federally insured against losses that may occur in a stock market crash. Financial institutions should tell you whether they are insured or not. If they are insured, they usually have a limit they are liable to pay. You also want to make sure the bank is federally insured up to an amount higher than what you expect to save.
![Page 114: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-30 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Open a Savings Account
Request Service Once you choose a bank, tell someone who works there that you want to open
a savings account.
Bank Form Once you tell the bank personnel you want to open a savings account, they
will ask you to fill out a savings account bank form that lists your • Name • Social security number • Address
Sample Bank Form
The table below is a sample bank form you may have to complete.
Primary Applicant Information Secondary Applicant Information
Last Name, First Name, Middle Initial
Last Name, First Name, Middle Initial
Date of Birth Date of Birth Home Address (Number and Street)
Home Address (Number and Street)
City City State State Zip Code Zip Code Home Phone Home Phone
Note: The secondary application information is filled out if you are opening
a joint account. A joint account means that a parent, spouse, or child will share your account with you.
Minimum Deposit
Once you complete the bank form, you will need to deposit a minimum amount of money into your new account. Check with the bank personnel to find out what your minimum deposit will be before you open the account.
![Page 115: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-31 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Using Your Savings Account
Electronic Deposit
Once you have established a savings account, a good way to use it wisely for your financial planning is through an electronic deposit system. This system allows the bank to automatically withhold a specified savings allotment from your paycheck and deposit it into your savings account. You can set up an electronic savings deposit in three ways: • “A” (savings) allotment • “B” (bond) allotment • Direct deposit
“A” (Savings) Allotment
If you decide to use an “A” (savings) allotment, a set amount of money will be withheld from your paycheck at the mid-month and the beginning-of-the-month paydays. This amount is automatically deposited to your savings account at the end of the month.
“B” (Bond) Allotment
If you decide to use a “B” (bond) allotment, you will purchase a U. S. savings bond with the deduction from your paycheck. The amounts and types of savings bond deduction plans are numerous. Obtain information about them at your administrative or disbursing office or from your savings bond representative.
Direct Deposit Direct deposit is the U.S. Treasury's name for an electronic funds transfer
system that transfers your salary directly to your checking and/or savings accounts. The direct deposit system is fast and reliable because it uses the Federal Reserve Distribution System. With direct deposit, your paycheck goes directly into your bank account.
![Page 116: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-32 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Individual Retirement Account
Definition Individual retirement accounts (IRAs) have been around since 1974. An IRA is
your investment in a retirement fund for yourself. Generally the money you invest in an IRA is deducted from your taxable income (before taxes are assessed). In addition, interest you earn on the IRA is deferred until you withdraw funds from the account; that means you do not pay taxes on interest you earn until you start collecting from the IRA.
Basic Types You can set up different kinds of IRAs with a variety of organizations:
• Through a traditional source
• Mutual fund • Life insurance company • Stock broker
• As part of a simplified employee pension (SEP) • In a Roth IRA
Traditional IRA
The traditional IRA allows you to contribute and defer taxes on up to $3,000 ($4,000 in 2004 and $5,000 in 2005) of earned income to a qualified retirement account. To be deductible, contributions to traditional IRAs require • Single taxpayers’ adjusted gross income not to exceed $33,000 • The combined adjusted gross income for married couples to be $53,000 Traditional IRA earnings accumulate on a tax-deferred basis. Minimum distributions must be taken beginning at the age of 70 ½.
SEP A simplified employee pension (SEP) is a written arrangement (a plan) that
allows an employer who’s self-employed to contribute, without becoming involved in more complex arrangements, to • His or her own (if self-employed) retirement plans • Employees’ retirement plans Each participant under the SEP may establish his or her IRA accounts at the institution of his or her choice. SEP contributions are limited to 15 percent of compensation to a maximum of $24,000.
Continued on next page
![Page 117: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-33 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Individual Retirement Account, Continued
Roth IRA The Roth IRA, named after Senator Roth from Delaware, offers an attractive
alternative to the ordinary IRA. Roth IRAs are not eligible for SEPs. You cannot deduct your contributions to a Roth IRA, but you receive all qualified distributions tax-free. Under certain conditions, this factor could work out to be a huge advantage for you. Contributions are post-tax and are not tax-deductible, but earnings on the account are tax deductible and accumulate tax-free. Qualified withdrawals may be made tax-free with no annual limits. No minimum distributions are required at 70 ½ years of age. A single person may open a Roth IRA with an adjusted gross income of up to $110,000; for a married couple, up to $160,000 in the year of commencement. Subsequent years have no income requirements.
![Page 118: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-34 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Setting Up an IRA
Who is Eligible An individual who
• Earned income (a salary) • Is under 70 ½ years of age • Wishes to defer or eliminate the payment of taxes on income funds set aside
for retirement
Creation An IRA account is created by
• A written document • The trustee or custodian who must be a/an
• Bank • Federally insured credit union • Savings and loan association • Entity approved by the IRS to act as trustee or custodian
Disclosure Statement
The disclosure statement given to you by the plan trustee or issuer (sometimes called the sponsor) must contain plain-language explanations of certain items such as • Information on when and how you can revoke the IRA • The name, address, and telephone number of the person to receive the
notice cancellation This explanation must appear at the beginning of the disclosure statement. The sponsor of the traditional IRA you choose must give you a disclosure statement about your arrangement at least 7 days before you set up your IRA. However, the sponsor can give you the statement by the date you set up (or purchase, if earlier) your IRA, if you are given at least 7 days from the date to revoke the IRA. If you revoke your IRA within the revocation period, the sponsor must return the entire amount you paid.
Continued on next page
![Page 119: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-35 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Setting Up an IRA, Continued
Contributions Contributions must be deposited to the account either during the calendar year
or no later than April 15th of the following year. Such contributions may be fully or partially deductible from a person’s taxes depending on their income level and whether or not they are a participant under an employer-sponsored plan. Distributions may be taken from age 59 ½ years without penalty.
![Page 120: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-36 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
IRA Withdrawals
Guidelines IRA withdrawal guidelines vary by type of IRA.
Traditional IRAs
With traditional IRAs, withdrawals made prior to age 59 ½ are subject to income tax plus an additional 10-percent penalty unless an exception applies for • Permanent disability • Death • Substantially equal periodic payments
Roth IRAs Earnings from a Roth IRA may be withdrawn tax free if the Roth IRA has a
5-year holding period and one of the following criteria is met: • Person withdrawing is age 59 ½ • Money is to purchase a first home ($10,000 lifetime cap) • Person withdrawing is permanently disabled • Owner dies
![Page 121: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-37 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Thrift Savings Plan
What Is The Thrift Savings Plan (TSP)
The Thrift Savings Plan (TSP) is a retirement savings and investment plan that has been available to civilian employees of the Federal Government since 1987. On October 30, 2000, President Clinton signed the Floyd D. Spence National Defense Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 2001. One provision of the law extended participation in the TSP, which was originally only for Federal civilian employees, to members of the uniformed services. Uniformed service members were first able to enroll in the TSP during a special open season from October 9, 2001 to January 31, 2002.
Purpose The purpose of the TSP is to provide retirement income. It offers participants
the same type of savings and tax benefits that many private corporations offer their employees under so-called 401(k) plans.
The TSP allows participants to save a portion of their pay in a special retirement account administered by the Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board. The money that participants invest in the TSP generally comes from pre-tax dollars and reduces their current taxable income. Members who serve in a combat zone can also contribute from tax-exempt dollars. Such contributions are tax-free when withdrawn; however, earnings on such contributions are taxed when they are withdrawn.
Getting Started While you are a member of the uniformed services, your service is your
primary TSP contact. Your service will provide you with TSP forms and informational materials and answer your questions about the TSP. You will submit the Election Form (TSP-U-1) to your service to enroll in the TSP.
(Your service may use an electronic version of the Election Form, e.g., on the Employee/Member Self-Service System. Your service will advise you regarding the availability of this method.)
Continued on next page
![Page 122: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-38 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Thrift Savings Plan, Continued
How much May I contribute?
In 2003, you can contribute up to 8 percent of the basic pay you earn each month.
Note: Your contribution limit will increase by 1% in December of each year until December 2005, when contributions will be limited only by the elective deferral amount ($15,000 in 2006). You may also contribute all or any whole percentage of any incentive or special pay (including reenlistment or other bonuses) you receive. However, the total amount you contribute each year cannot exceed the Internal Revenue Code's elective deferral limit (26 U.S.C. 402(g)) for the year. Please refer to the Defense Finance and Accounting System (DFAS) Web site at www.dfas.gov or talk to your service TSP representative for information about the uniformed services elements of pay.
If you are a member of the Ready Reserve or National Guard and have a civilian TSP account, the total of all your contributions to all of your plans cannot exceed the Internal Revenue Code's elective deferral limit. However, if you also participate in a Section 457 plan, your contributions to the TSP are not limited by any of your contributions to your section 457 plan.
In addition, if you contribute tax-exempt dollars from combat zone pay, your contributions are subject to another Internal Revenue Code section (26 U.S.C. 415(c)) which limits your contributions to the TSP and other qualified plans in 2002 to $40,000 or 100 percent of your compensation, whichever is less. This includes pre-tax and tax-exempt contributions to the TSP for the year.
Continued on next page
![Page 123: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-39 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Thrift Savings Plan, Continued
Features of The TSP
You can contribute up to 8 percent of your basic pay each pay period to your TSP account as soon as you become a member of the uniformed service. If you contribute to the TSP from your basic pay, you may also contribute from one to 100 percent of any incentive pay or special pay (including bonus pay) you receive, up to the limits established by the Internal Revenue Code.
The TSP also offers the following:
• Immediate member contributions • Before-tax and tax deferred investment earnings • Low administrative and investment expenses • Transfers into the TSP from other qualified retirement plans • A choice of five investment funds:
• Government Securities Investment (G) Fund • Fixed Income Index Investment (F) Fund • Common Stock Index Investment (C) Fund • Small Capitalization Stock Index Investment (S) Fund • International Stock Index Investment (I) Fund
• Interfund transfers • Loans from your own contributions and attributable earnings while you are
in service • In-service withdrawals for financial hardship or after you reach age 59 ½ • Portable benefits and a choice of withdrawal options after you separate
from service • The ability to designate beneficiaries for your account balance • Spouse’s rights protection for loans and withdrawals and recognition of
qualifying court orders • A web site with general account information, capability for requesting
contribution allocations and interfund transfers, up-to-date TSP materials and information, and calculators to estimate account growth and annuity amounts
• An automated telephone service (the ThriftLine) for Plan and account information and certain transactions
![Page 124: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-40 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Insurance
Purpose Arranging for life insurance coverage now may seem unimportant. However,
think about those who rely on you financially. Your death would deprive your family of your income, yet they would still have to pay rent, car payments, credit card bills, and medical expenses. Life insurance provides the financial cushion that allows your loved ones to adjust financially to life without you. Most people buy life insurance to provide financial protection for their dependents in the event of their death. For those in the military, maintaining adequate insurance is especially important. As a responsible, thoughtful person, you will want to carefully provide for your family in the event of your death, no matter how remote it may seem today.
Part of Financial Planning
Most people jump into an insurance policy without having enough information about insurance. Learning as much as you can about the insurance will help you make appropriate choices when buying life insurance. Your decision should be based on your life needs and circumstances. In addition, you should reevaluate your insurance coverage as your circumstances and needs change. As part of your financial planning, you should review your insurance coverage and needs whenever you have a life change such as • Promotion • Marriage • Birth of child • Death of family member • College (yourself or a family member) • Purchase of a home Doing so will help you make appropriate choices when buying life insurance and ensure you are financially stable for your specific circumstances.
![Page 125: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-41 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Types of Insurance
Service Group Life Insurance (SGLI)
All members of the uniformed services, including service adademy cadets are automatically insured under Servicemember’s Group Life Insurance (SGLI) for $250,000, unless they elect in writing to be covered for a lesser amount, or not to be covered at all. Full-time coverage is also provided, under certain conditions, for (1) persons who volunteer for assignment to the Ready Reserve of a uniformed service, and (2) persons assigned to or who, upon application, would be eligible for assignment to the Retired Reserve of a uniformed service and have completed at least 20 years of satisfactory service creditable for retirement purposes but have not begun receiving retired pay. • Part-time coverage is provided, under certain conditions, to members of the
Reserves who do not qualify for full-time coverage. • SGLI has no loan, cash, paid-up or extended values. • SGLI is provided at no cost for 120 days following an individual’s
separation or retirement from active duty.
Dependent SGLI Insurance
The Veteran’s Opportunities Act of 2001 extended life insurance coverage to spouses and children of service members under the SGLI program effective November 1, 2001. Family coverage is available for the spouses and children of • Active duty service members • Members of the Ready Reserve of a uniformed service
Continued on next page
![Page 126: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-42 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Types of Insurance, Continued
Veterans Group Life Insurance (VGLI)
Veterans Group Life Insurance (VGLI) is a 5-year term insurance policy available, upon application, to all members being separated or released from active duty, active duty for training, initial active duty for training or upon separation from the Ready Reserve. VGLI is renewable for life in 5-year term periods and may be converted to a commercial insurance policy at any time. VGLI may not be issued in an amount greater than the amount of SGLI carried at the time of separation from service. Members wishing to continue group coverage under the VGLI program must submit application and payment of first premium within 120 days of separation. If application (unless totally disabled) is not made within the 120-day period, application may be made within 1 year after SGLI coverage terminates provided evidence of good health is provided. If the member is totally disabled on the date of separation, application for VGLI may be made anytime during the one year extended SGLI coverage period. The effective date of VGLI will be the day following the end of the 1-yar period or the day following the date disability ends, whichever is earlier. Evidence of continuing disability may be required in such cases.
Continued on next page
![Page 127: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-43 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Types of Insurance, Continued
Whole Life Your whole life policy provides the maximum amount of protection against
your death for an indefinite amount of time, throughout your "whole life." For whole life insurance, • Premiums remain at a fixed rate. • The period between payments stays the same. • The amount of insurance coverage for the entire lifespan of the policyholder
does not change no matter what happens to you. • Companies also include a savings element called cash value. You may
borrow against the cash value of your policy.
Term Life Term life insurance provides protection for only a specific period of time
(number of years) at a certain cost. The face amount of the policy is only payable if death occurs. The two general types of term insurance are • Level term - The amount of insurance coverage remains the same over each
renewal period; however, at the start of each renewal period, insurance cost increases.
• Decreasing term - Provides a reduced amount of coverage for the same
premium cost each renewal.
Continued on next page
![Page 128: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-44 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Types of Insurance, Continued
Term or Whole Life Insurance Combinations
The table below describes general types of life insurance policies that are either term policies or combinations of term and whole life policies.
Type Description
Universal • Cash reserves build from the amount you pay over the premium. The increase can be borrowed against or paid to the beneficiary.
• Policyholder can pay premiums at any time in any
amount (with limitations). • Income tax is deferred until the cash is withdrawn.
Ordinary The policyholder usually pays the same premium throughout the life of the policy (although sometimes he/she can arrange to pay a specified amount for a specified period of time).
Permanent • Covers whole life span. • Premium can be borrowed with interest or paid to the
policyholder upon surrender of the policy. Adjustment Policyholder can "adjust" coverage to meet his/her needs
by increasing or decreasing the premium amount or period covered.
Variable What "varies" could be the amount of death benefit or profits from the portion of the premium invested.
Annuity and Endowments
Pay a lump sum or income to policyholder that lives to a certain age or after a certain amount is paid (or pays a beneficiary).
![Page 129: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-45 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Comparison Between Whole and Term Life Insurance
Benefits of Whole Life
The comparison is easiest to understand when you first look at the way whole life works. When you buy a certain amount of whole life at a certain price, there generally will be no change in the • Amount of premium • Period between payments • Amount of insurance coverage you will have for the rest of your life
Disadvantages of Term Life
If you were to buy that same amount of coverage as term insurance, as you get older • You would pay more for that coverage. • The coverage would be for a shorter period. • The insurance company could decide you are no longer eligible for their
coverage.
Decision Based on Life’s Situation
Although term insurance looks great at the beginning because it is cheaper, you should now understand that whole life coverage has specific benefits too. Choosing which type of insurance to buy should be based on why you are buying the insurance and on your financial goals.
![Page 130: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-46 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Choosing the Best Policy
Read Before buying insurance, read the policy and understand the coverage you are
buying.
Know Your Insurance Rights
Make sure your insurance company is licensed with the state. If it is, the insurance commission can be helpful if a misunderstanding or dispute occurs between you and the insurance company. Insurance professionals can give you general guidelines about your rights when buying insurance. You can cancel or lapse a policy at any time, but you must pay the premium for the time the policy was in force. If your insurance company collects personal information about you, ask how it will be used. If your insurance company has incorrect information about you in their files that resulted in your being turned down for insurance, make sure it is corrected.
Know the Insurance Company’s Rating
Insurance companies are rated by independent rating services, such as Best's Insurance Reports (available in most libraries). A rating of "A" or better (A+ or A++) indicates financial stability and that the company is good on paying claims. Your insurance broker or state insurance commissioner can give you the rating. Use "A-rated" companies only!
Evaluate Your Needs
The amount of insurance you need depends on how old you are, your situation, marital status, number of dependents, income, etc. Purchase insurance that meets your needs and financial plan.
Read Free Government Information
"What You Should Know About Life Insurance" is a free publication available quarterly. You can obtain a copy by contacting Consumer Information Center, Pueblo, CO 81009.
![Page 131: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-47 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Determining the Amount of Insurance You Need
Three Methods Picking a life insurance policy is a multifaceted problem. Because many
factors are involved in projecting the future economy (like inflation and recession) and your future employment, no single, fixed formula exists to determine the amount of life insurance a person should have. The three approaches to determining the amount of insurance you need to purchase are • Multiple earnings • Needs • Common sense
![Page 132: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-48 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Multiple Earnings Approach
Definition Under the multiple earnings model, the required amount of life insurance is a
direct function of the insured’s annual income. One version of this approach multiplies current earnings by a factor of 5 times 12 months and increases that amount by the value of the unpaid home mortgage plus $50,000 for each child living at home.
Example Procedure
A member with a spouse, two children in high school, and $125,000 outstanding mortgage has a monthly gross income (base pay plus basic allowance for housing [BAH]) of $5,100. Using the multiple earnings approach described above, the amount of insurance this member should purchase is 1. Salary multiplied by 5: $ 5,100 x 5 = $ 25,500 2. Result of step 1 multiplied by 12 months: $ 25,500 x 12 = $ 306,000 3. Add outstanding mortgage balance: $ 306,000 + $ 125,000 = $ 431,000 4. Multiply number of children at home by $50, 000: $50,000 x 2 = $
100,000 5. Add results of step 3 and 4 together to get total insurance requirement:
$ 431,000 + $ 100,000 = $ 531,000 The amount of insurance this member should purchase is $ 531,000.
![Page 133: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-49 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Needs Approach
Definition This technique of estimating insurance requirements examines the financial
situation of the insured and considers other resources that may be available. While it takes more effort than the multiple earnings method, it produces an estimate specifically tailored to an individual's situation.
Eight Steps The table below list the eight steps for the needs approach.
Step Action 1 Determine amount of income available to survivors when you die. 2 Determine amount of expenses that must be paid (not continuing
financial needs) upon your death. 3 Subtract amount of expenses from step 2 from the amount of income
from step 1. If the amount of expenses is • Less than the income, the difference results in excess income
available to survivors. • Greater than the income, the difference results in a shortage and
should be placed in brackets to indicate the shortage amount 4 Identify family insurance policies currently purchased by
• Policy number • Type of insurance • Name of insurance company • Beneficiary • Face value
5 Determine family’s projected monthly income from all sources. 6 Determine family’s projected monthly expenses (continuing financial
needs) for all items. 7 Subtract the amount of expenses from step 5 from the amount of
income from step 6. If the amount of expenses is • Less than the income, the difference results in excess income
available to survivors. • Greater than the income, the difference results in a shortage and
should be placed in brackets to indicate the shortage amount. 8 Determine the amount (if any) of insurance you need to make up for
any shortages.
Continued on next page
![Page 134: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-50 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Needs Approach Worksheet
Step 1 Determine amount of income available to survivors when you die. Add all
sources together.
Source of Income Amount Military Death Gratuity Pay Back Pay and Allowances VA Death Benefit Payment Social Security Death Benefit Proceeds of SGLI/VGLI Insurance
Policy Number
Policy Number Other Sources of Income (Explain)
From
From From From
Total Income Available to Survivors
Continued on next page
![Page 135: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-51 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued
Step 2 Determine amount of expenses that must be paid (not continuing financial
needs) upon your death. Add all expenses together.
Reason for Expense Amount Executor’s Fund (count on $ 5,000) Home Mortgage Payoff (1st mortgage) Home Mortgage Payoff (2nd mortgage) Funeral Expenses (count on $ 5,000) Emergency Expenses (count on $ 5,000) Automobile Loans to be Paid Off
1st vehicle
2nd vehicle 3rd vehicle
Other Loans to be Paid Off (Explain) For
For For For
Other Expenses (Explain) For For For
Total Expenses Upon Your Death
Continued on next page
![Page 136: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-52 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued
Step 3 Subtract amount of expenses from step 2 from the amount of income from
step 1. If the amount of expenses is • Less than the income, the difference results in excess income available to
survivors. • Greater than the income, the difference results in a shortage and should be
placed in brackets to indicate the shortage amount.
Step Result Amount Amount of Income from Step 1 Amount of Expenses from Step 2 Difference (Excess Income or Shortage)
Notes: If the difference in step 3 indicates that your family’s income is
enough to cover the immediate expenses they will face, your first concern about their financial well-being is satisfied. But, remember, this only covers their immediate expenses; it does not provide for a continued source of income for their day-to-day, month-to-month living expenses. These living expenses are the next greatest concern you will face.
If the difference in step 3 shows that your survivors will not have enough immediate cash available to cover their expenses, they will be in deep trouble. You need to take immediate action to ensure their financial security. Remember, insurance benefits only cover a source of immediate funds. Other investments (stocks, mutual funds, IRAs, etc.) may be a source of ongoing income.
Continued on next page
![Page 137: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-53 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued
Step 4 Identify family insurance policies currently purchased by
• Policy number • Type of insurance • Name of insurance company • Beneficiary • Face value
Policy
Number Type of
Insurance Name of
Insurance Company
Beneficiary Face Value
Continued on next page
![Page 138: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-54 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued
Step 5 Determine family’s projected monthly income from all sources. Add all
amounts together.
Source Amount Surviving Spouse’s Salary Survivor Benefit Plan Payments Dependency and Indemnity Compensation Payments
VA Pension VA Benefits (Explain)
For Spouse For Children For Parents
Social Security Benefits (Explain) For Spouse For Children For Parents
Other Income (Explain) For For For
Total Monthly Income for Family
Continued on next page
![Page 139: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-55 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued
Step 6 Determine family’s projected monthly expenses (continuing financial needs)
for all items. Add all monthly expenses together.
Reason for Expense Amount Rent or Mortgage Payment Utilities
Electricity
Gas Water
Telephone Cable Television Food Clothing Entertainment Transportation Loan Payments (Explain)
For
For For
Other Expenses (Explain) For
For For
Total Monthly Living Expenses
Continued on next page
![Page 140: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-56 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued
Step 7 Subtract the amount of expenses from step 5 from the amount of income from
step 6. If the amount of expenses is • Less than the income, the difference results in excess income available to
survivors. • Greater than the income, the difference results in a shortage and should be
placed in brackets to indicate the shortage amount.
Step Result Amount Amount of Income from Step 6 Amount of Expenses from Step 5 Difference (Excess Income or Shortage)
Notes: If the difference in step 7 indicates that your family’s monthly income after your death is enough to cover their anticipated monthly expenses, your immediate concern regarding their financial security should be at ease.
Although it appears they will be provided for, they should have an income “cushion” to guard against emergencies, inflation, disasters, and the death of other family members. On the other hand, if the difference in step 7 indicates that your survivors will not have enough monthly income to cover their expenses, you should take immediate action to preclude them from experiencing major financial difficulties. The quickest and least expensive action you can take is to immediately increase your life insurance. Little can be done to protect your family after you are gone, and you could be “gone” tomorrow.
Other steps you can take now to protect your family are to invest in relatively safe stocks, mutual funds, or IRAs and to save, save, and save some more.
Continued on next page
![Page 141: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-57 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued
Step 8 Determine the amount (if any) of insurance you need to make up for any
shortages. After you have completed the computations in the previous seven steps, you might find yourself fortunate enough to have sufficient insurance to satisfy your present financial needs as well as the needs of your survivors after you are gone. By the same token, you may have determined that the amount of life insurance protection you are presently carrying will be insufficient to provide your family with the financial protection they will need and deserve. As your income level increases, and you are able to place more money into sound investments that provide the financial security you seek, your insurance needs may decline. But until you reach that “safety net,” it is better to be safe than sorry.
![Page 142: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-58 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Common Sense Approach
Definition The common sense approach calculates the future financial expenses of your
family (like car, house, and education) to determine the amount of life insurance you need.
Procedure In the common sense approach, you
• Determine your family’s financial need
• Immediate expenses • Long-term expenses
• Determine your family’s financial assets • Determine the life insurance needed by subtracting the total assets from the
total needs
![Page 143: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-59 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Common Sense Approach Worksheet
Needs List the reason for immediate and long-term expenses and each cost. Add the
amount of expenses together to determine your family’s financial needs.
Reason for Expense Amount Immediate Expenses
Funeral Expenses Uninsured Medical Expenses Estate Settlement Expenses
Long-Term Expenses Emergency Fund Repayment of Debts Family Living Expenses Homemaking Expenses (child care, house and lawn care, etc.)
Education Fund Retirement Fund
All Other Expenses Total Needs
Assets To determine your family’s financial assets, list the source and amount of all
income. Add all income together.
Source of Income Amount Current Life Insurance (All policies) All Pension Benefits Cash and Savings Equity in Real Estate (If it were to be sold) All Investments (Stocks, bonds, mutual funds, IRAs, Keogh plans, etc.)
Social Security Survivor Benefits (Monthly amount times Number of months)
All Other Income Total Assets
Continued on next page
![Page 144: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-60 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Common Sense Approach Worksheet, Continued
Insurance Required
Subtract the total assets from the total needs to determine the amount of insurance you need. The result would be the amount of insurance you need.
Insurance Calculation Amount
Total Needs Total Assets Life Insurance Needed
![Page 145: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-61 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete the following items. Check your answers against those listed at the
end of this lesson. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item 1 What are the three factors to consider when choosing a financial institution to
start a savings account? a. Bank’s location, interest rate, and insurance b. Credit card interest rates, bank location, or time attendance c. Shop around, credit ratings, or interest rates d. Credit line, interest rates, or credit ratings
Item 2 What are the three different kinds of IRAs?
a. Roth, trustee, and SEP b. Traditional, Roth, and individual c. Tax free, withdrawals, and rollovers d. SEP, traditional, and Roth
Continued on next page
![Page 146: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-62 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 3 Under what age are you eligible to set up an IRA?
a. 21 b. 45 c. 59 ½ d. 70 ½
Item 4 The minimum age at which you can draw funds from your IRA without
penalty is a. 21 b. 45 c. 59 ½ d. 70 ½
Items 5 Through 8
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the type of insurance from column 2 that is defined in column 1. You may use the answers in column 2 only once.
Column 1 Definition
Column 2 Type of Insurance
___ 5. Cash reserves build from amount you pay over the premium and can be borrowed against
___ 6. Provides protection for a specified period of time at a certain cost
___ 7. Covers whole life span and premium can be borrowed with interest paid to policyholder upon surrender of the policy
___ 8. Policyholder usually pays the same premium through the life of the policy
a. Whole life b. Term life c. Ordinary d. Universal e. Permanent
Continued on next page
![Page 147: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-63 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 9 What does an insurance rating tell you about the insurance company?
a. The company is licensed with the state in which it is operating. b. The company has reasonable rates and is good on paying claims. c. The company satisfies customers with the amount paid on claims. d. The company is financially stable and good on paying claims.
Item 10 Which of the following lists the three approaches to determine insurance
needs? a. Multiple household, needs, and assets b. Multiple earnings, needs, and common sense c. Multiple earnings, wants, and assets d. Multiple policies, desires, and common sense
Items 11 Through 13
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the type of approach to determine insurance needs from column 2 that best fits the description in column 1. You may use the answers in column 2 only once.
Column 1 Description
Column 2 Type of Approach to Determine Insurance Needs
___ 11. Examines financial
situation and considers resources available
___ 12. Determines required amount of insurance as a direct function of the annual income
___ 13. Calculates future immediate and long-term expenses to determine amount of insurance required
a. Multiple household b. Multiple earnings c. Needs d. Common sense e. Assets
![Page 148: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 4-64 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the correct answers to the exercise items. If you
have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 a 4-29 2 d 4-32 3 d 4-34 4 c 4-35 5 a 4-43 6 b 4-43 7 e 4-44 8 c 4-44 9 d 4-46 10 b 4-47 11 c 4-49 12 b 4-48 13 d 4-58
![Page 149: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5 5-1
STUDY UNIT 5
WEIGHT CONTROL AND MILITARY APPEARANCE
Overview
Estimated Study Time
2 hours, 55 minutes
Unit Scope This study unit will give you the required information for evaluating a
Marine’s physical fitness level. This unit will provide the SNCO with the appropriate references for remedial and personal appearance programs.
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you will be able to • List the objectives of the Marine Corps Physical Fitness Test and Body
Composition Manual. • Define physical fitness. • Identify the Marine Corps Order that states the objectives and purpose of
the Marine Corps physical fitness program. • Identify the applicable references for weight control. • Identify the applicable references for the remedial programs. • Identify the applicable references for the personal appearance programs.
Continued on next page
![Page 150: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5 5-2
Overview, Continued
In this Study Unit
This study unit contains the following lessons:
Topic See Page
Lesson 1 Importance of Physical Fitness 5-3 Lesson 2 Basic Concepts of Physical Fitness 5-9 Lesson 3 Maintaining a Military Appearance 5-17 Lesson 4 Remedial Physical Training Program 5-33
![Page 151: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 5-3
LESSON 1
IMPORTANCE OF PHYSICAL FITNESS
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope This lesson is designed to provide easy to use practical information. Further
it will provide guidelines to help you design and execute an optimal physical fitness training program and nutrition programs. This guide is not about “quick fixes.” It is about lifestyle changes. It is important to identify early those who will have trouble meeting standards so that they may begin a comprehensive program. This lesson discusses federal government statistics on physical fitness, what the Marine Corps policy on physical fitness is, and what benefits physical fitness brings.
Learning Objectives
After completion of this lesson, you should be able to • Select the percentage of men and women who are overweight. • Select, from a list, the order for the Marine Corps physical fitness
program. • List the benefits of fitness.
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 5-3 Marine Corps Policy 5-4 Ineffective Physical Fitness Programs 5-5 Benefits of Physical Fitness 5-6 Lesson 1 Exercise 5-7
![Page 152: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 5-4
Marine Corps Policy
General An effective physical conditioning program must have command support. It
is essential for leaders to understand the importance and the goals of the Marine Corps physical conditioning program. Leaders should be visible and active participants in physical conditioning programs. This is most effectively done if leaders lead physical training (PT). Physical fitness must be an integral part of a unit’s training mission.
Essential for Battlefield Performance
The term “physical fitness” means different things to different people. To the Marine Corps it is an indispensable part of leadership and self-discipline and is necessary for performance on the battlefield.
Lack of Fitness Widespread in Society
According to recent federal government statistics, over 30 percent of men and women of all races are overweight or obese.
A survey by the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services indicated that only 42 percent of adults participate in exercise on a regular basis.
Marine Corps Physical Conditioning Program
Thankfully, the lack of fitness just discussed is not the case in the Marine Corps. Physical fitness has always been a vital part of Marine Corps life. Marine Corps Order 6100.12 states the physical conditioning program scope as follows: Every Marine must be physically fit, regardless of age, grade, or duty assignment. Fitness is essential to the day-to-day effectiveness and combat readiness of the Marine Corps. Further, physical fitness is an indispensable aspect of leadership. The habits of self-discipline required to gain and maintain a high level of physical fitness are inherent in the Marine Corps way of life and must be a part of the character of every Marine. Marines who are not physically fit can be a detriment to the readiness and combat efficiency of their unit. Accordingly, every Marine will engage in an effective Physical Conditioning Program (PCP) on a continuing and progressive basis.
![Page 153: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 5-5
Ineffective Physical Fitness Programs
General Commanders must ensure that the time spent participating in physical fitness
activities is used effectively. PT should support the unit’s mission as well as enhance unit cohesion, morale and physical fitness and health. Ineffective PT programs can lead to • lack of progress • injuries • poor morale • wasted time
Factors Factors that may lead to an ineffective PT session are listed below:
• Unmotivated PT leaders • Group too large for number of assigned leaders • Workout too hard or too easy • Poor exercise choice • Failure to motivate participants • Too many (or too long) rest breaks
![Page 154: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 5-6
Benefits of Physical Fitness
General Having a physically fit fighting force is a tremendous advantage for the
military commander both in peacetime and war. There are considerable benefits to the individual Marine as well.
Commander’s Perspective
The Commander's perspective on the benefits of fitness are listed below: • Less sick time • Increased combat readiness • More motivated Marines • Increased morale • Increased productivity • More confidence in troops • Better image for the Marine Corps • Inspires public confidence in the Marine Corps • More options on the battlefield
Individual Marine’s Perspective
The individual Marine's perspective on the benefits of fitness are listed below: • More energy and confidence • Better health • Improved appearance • Improved performance on physical fitness test (PFT) • Increased combat readiness • Personal satisfaction
![Page 155: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 5-7
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 3 by performing the action required. Check your
answer against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 According to recent federal government statistics, what is the percentage of
men and women who are over weight? a. 32 b. 33 c. 38 d. 39
Item 2 What Marine Corps Order states the scope of the Marine Corps physical
fitness program? a. 6100.12 b. 6110.34 c. 2030.3J d. 1020.2B
Item 3 List four benefits of fitness.
(1) ___________________________________________________________ (2) ___________________________________________________________ (3) ___________________________________________________________ (4) ___________________________________________________________
![Page 156: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 5-8
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions about these items, refer to the reference page.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 b 5-4 2 a 5-4 3 (1) more energy and
confidence (2) better health (3) improved appearance (4) improved performance on
PFT (5) increased combat
readiness (6) personal satisfaction
5-6
Summary In this lesson, you learned about the importance of physical fitness, Marine
Corps policy, and the benefits of fitness. In the next lesson, you will learn about the concepts and physical conditions of fitness.
![Page 157: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 5-9
LESSON 2
BASIC CONCEPTS OF PHYSICAL FITNESS
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the physical fitness terms, conditioning principles, and
states the goals of the Marine Corps physical conditioning program.
Learning Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you should be able to • Define physical fitness. • List the five components of physical fitness. • Identify the physical conditioning principles. • List the goals of the Marine Corps physical conditioning program as listed
in MCO 6100.12.
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 5-9 Physical Fitness Terms 5-10 Physical Conditioning Principles 5-11 The Marine Corps Physical Conditioning Program 5-12 Lesson 2 Exercise 5-13
![Page 158: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 5-10
Physical Fitness Terms
Definition Physical fitness can be defined as a state of good physical health. A
physically fit body is functioning properly and beyond that, functioning well.
Components The definitions of the components of physical fitness are listed in the table
below:
Component Definition Cardiorespiratory Fitness The body’s ability to deliver oxygen to working
muscle and the ability of the working muscles to utilize oxygen and remove waste products. Cardiorespiratory fitness is directly related to the health and function of the respiratory system, the lungs, heart, and circulatory system.
Muscular Strength The amount of force that a muscle can produce. We generally measure muscular strength by performing specific exercises with weights or with body weight (pull-ups or push-ups).
Muscular Endurance The ability to perform repeated actions or movements over an extended period of time. You measure muscular endurance when you conduct the timed sit-up portion of the PFT.
Flexibility The ability to move a body part through a complete range of motion with no pain.
Leanness (low body fat) A measure of the percentage of a person’s body mass that is lean tissue and not body fat.
![Page 159: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 5-11
Physical Conditioning Principles
Progression There must be a gradual increase in difficulty and duration or both of a
physical fitness program for continual progress to be made. If there is no progression in difficulty and/or duration of your physical training sessions, your body eventually adapts to it and no further physiological changes take place.
Specificity The adaptations that occur are highly specific to the activity that produced
those adaptations. In other words, you get better at what you do regularly. For example, although swimming is a good exercise, it will not improve three-mile run times as much as running will.
Overload The workload or intensity must be greater than that normally encountered by
the body to stimulate physiological changes. There must be a gradual increase in difficulty or duration of a physical fitness program in order for continual progress to be made.
Intensity Intensity refers to how hard or how difficult a physical fitness program is in
terms of physical exertion. Physical exertion meaning the degree of strength, force, or energy used.
Recovery Adaptations to physical training programs do not occur during the course of
an exercise session. They occur during the recovery period. It may take days to recover from a hard training session. Over training and injuries are inevitable unless adequate recovery is a part of the physical fitness program.
![Page 160: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 5-12
The Marine Corps Physical Conditioning Program
General A good physical fitness program is aimed at improving all of the components
of physical fitness. The Marine Corps physical fitness test (PFT) is designed to test all of these components and a good score on the PFT indicates that a Marine is physically fit.
Goals The goals of the Marine Corps physical conditioning program (PCP) are
listed below: • Contribute to the health and well-being of every Marine through regular
exercise and health education. • Develop Marines who are physically capable of performing their duties in
garrison and in combat. • Develop in Marines a reserve level of physical fitness that will enhance
their chances of winning in a combat situation. • Provide a medium for developing the self-confidence of the individual
Marine and therefore enhances overall discipline, morale, esprit-de-corps, unit efficiency, and the desire to excel within the Marine Corps.
![Page 161: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise 5-13
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 8 by performing the action required. Check your
answer against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 What is the definition of physical fitness?
a. A state of good physical health b. A state of negative physical health c. Muscular strength d. Leanness
Item 2 List the five components of physical fitness.
(1) ___________________________________________________________ (2) ___________________________________________________________ (3) ___________________________________________________________ (4) ___________________________________________________________ (5) ___________________________________________________________
Item 3 For continual progress to be made, ________ must be incorporated in your
physical fitness program. a. specificity b. overload c. progression d. intensity
Continued on next page
![Page 162: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise 5-14
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 4 What is specificity?
a. The gradual increase in difficulty or duration of a physical fitness
program. b. Adaptations that occur are highly specific to the activity that produced
those adaptations. c. The difficulty of the physical fitness program. d. The intensity of the workout.
Item 5 What must you include in a workout to force the body to make physiological
changes? a. Overload b. Specificity c. Recovery d. Intensity
Item 6 What determines how difficult your workout is during a physical fitness
program? a. Overload b. Specificity c. Recovery d. Intensity
Item 7 Adaptations to physical training programs do not occur during the course of
an exercise session, they occur during the ______________________ period. a. progression b. overload c. intensity d. recovery
Continued on next page
![Page 163: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise 5-15
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 8 List the goals of the Marine Corps physical conditioning program.
(1) ___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
(2) ___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
(3) ___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
(4) ___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Continued on next page
![Page 164: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise 5-16
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions about these items, refer to the reference page.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 a 5-10 2 (1) Cardiorespiratory fitness
(2) Muscular strength (3) Muscular endurance (4) Flexibility (5) Leanness (low body fat)
5-10
3 c 5-11 4 b 5-11 5 a 5-11 6 d 5-11 7 d 5-11 8 a. Contribute to health and well-
being of every Marine through regular exercise and health education.
b. Develop Marines who are physically capable of performing their duties in garrison and in combat.
c. Develop in Marines a reserve level of physical fitness that will enhance their chances of winning in a combat situation.
d. Provide a medium for developing the self-confidence of the individual Marine and thereby enhance overall discipline, moral, esprit-de-corps, unit efficiency, and the desire to excel within the Marine Corps.
5-12
![Page 165: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-17
LESSON 3
MAINTAINING A MILITARY APPEARANCE
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
45 minutes
Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the knowledge needed for maintaining a military
appearance by utilizing healthy nutrition.
Learning Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you should be able to • Identify the seven basic categories of nutrients. • Identify the role of protein. • Identify the role of carbohydrates. • Identify the fate of excess protein or carbohydrates. • Identify the role of fat. • Identify the food guide pyramid.
Continued on next page
![Page 166: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-18
Introduction, Continued
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.
Topic See Page Introduction 5-17 Seven Basic Nutrients 5-19 Calories 5-21 Vitamins 5-22 Minerals 5-23 Metabolic 5-24 Putting the Weight Control Plan Together 5-25 The Food Guide Pyramid 5-27 Lesson 3 Exercise 5-30
![Page 167: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-19
Seven Basic Nutrients
Introduction What follows is a sound nutritional program based on the best information we
have today. It is the basic approach recommended by organizations like the American Heart Association, the American Dietetics Association, and the National Institutes of Health.
Basic Concepts Foods contain combinations of nutrients and no single food contains all of the
nutrients in the amounts that are necessary for optimum health. For example, oranges contain vitamin C but not B12.
The Basic Nutrients
The seven basic categories of nutrients are protein, carbohydrates, fat vitamins, minerals, fiber, and water.
Protein Good sources of protein are meats, fish, eggs, dairy products, beans, and
peanut butter. Protein serves primarily a structural role in the body. It is used to make structures like skin, hair, fingernails, cartilage, tendons, and muscle to name a few. Protein is also used to make some hormones and enzymes. Because of these roles, protein is necessary for survival.
Carbohydrates Carbohydrates are used primarily as an energy source. The body can actually
store carbohydrates in muscle and the liver in a form called glycogen. There are no established recommended daily allowances for carbohydrates. An adequate intake is the amount that is necessary to support your daily activities and keep body glycogen stores replenished. Sources of carbohydrates are fruits, vegetables, rice, pasta, bread, grains, beans, and sugars.
Excess Excess protein is simply converted to fat. Excess carbohydrates are stored as
glycogen. When glycogen stores are full, excess carbohydrates are converted to fat.
Continued on next page
![Page 168: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-20
Seven Basic Nutrients, Continued
Fat and its Role Fat is used primarily as a source of energy for the body. A small amount of
fat is used to make hormones and cell membranes. Most of the fat in the body is subcutaneous fat. Subcutaneous fat is the fat stored underneath the skin. This is the fat that you can see on the hips, stomach, legs etc. If it is loose and jiggles it is not water retention or a muscle that needs “toning,” it is fat.
Good Examples of Fat
A few good examples of fat are listed in the table below:
Name Example
Polyunsaturated • Corn • Flour • Certain fish • Nuts
Monounsaturated
• Vegetable and nut oils • Olive oil • Peanut oil • Canola oil
Saturated
• Meats and dairy products • Tropical oils (coconut and palm)
Cholesterol
• Meats • Animal products
![Page 169: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-21
Calories
Definition A calorie is a measure of the energy content of a food. Our bodies require a
certain number of calories (energy) to function. The number of calories that we require each day to function is our metabolic rate.
Blood Triglycerides
Saturated fat is most likely to elevate blood triglycerides, total cholesterol, and LDL cholesterol (bad cholesterol). Saturated fats are solid at room temperature. Elevated levels of these structural components are considered a risk factor for heart disease.
One Pound of Fat
Fat contains nine calories per gram. One pound of fat contains 3,500 calories (this is how many calories you must burn to lose one pound of fat). Some high fat foods are red meats, fried foods, potato chips, butter, eggs, bacon, and many “junk” foods.
![Page 170: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-22
Vitamins
Definition Vitamins are various organic substances that have no caloric value and are
essential to nutrition.
Fruits and Vegetables
A diet that is rich in fruits and vegetables and contains all of the major food groups will supply the recommended daily allowance of vitamins and minerals.
Fat-Soluble Vitamins A, D, E, and K are fat-soluble vitamins. A good source of vitamin
A and D can be found in animal products such as egg yolk, milk, or fish-liver oil. Vitamin E can be found in leaves and seed germ oils. Vitamin K is essential for the clotting of the blood and can be found in such foods as spinach, broccoli, lettuce, and cabbage.
Water-Soluble The B and C vitamins are water-soluble. Vitamin B is essential to normal
blood formation. Vitamin C is found in fruits and leafy vegetables.
![Page 171: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-23
Minerals
Purpose Minerals are elements that are necessary for life. Many act as co-factors that
help enzymes and hormones function properly. Some minerals are heavy metals and are toxic at high doses.
Fiber Fiber is a substance that cannot be digested or absorbed by the body. Plants
are our major source of fiber. High fiber foods are typically low in fat, a high fiber diet is associated with a lower risk of heart disease.
Water Water is the most abundant substance in the human body. It accounts for one
half to four fifths of our bodyweight. Water is essential for the process of digestion and absorption of nutrients and excretion of metabolic wastes. Water is vital for the regulation of body temperature, which becomes especially important if you PT in warm weather. We lose water through the lungs, the skin, by sweating and in the urine. The recommended intake is eight to ten cups of water daily.
What Does Not Help
You can hydrate the body by drinking coffee and sodas as they do contain water. However, due to high levels of caffeine you may have to drink twice as much to achieve the same degree of hydration. Caffeine is a diuretic meaning it tends to increase the flow of urine. Alcoholic drinks can actually be dehydrating. In other words you lose more water than you gain.
Thirst Thirst is a poor indicator of hydration status in a hot environment. If you only
drink when you are thirsty in a hot environment, you will get dehydrated.
![Page 172: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-24
Metabolic
Metabolic Rate Our metabolic rate is made up of two components, our resting metabolism
and our active metabolism • Our resting metabolism is simply how many calories our bodies burn at rest. • Active metabolism refers to the calories burned by activity (like exercise).
Keeping Track To determine metabolic rate, multiply your bodyweight (in lbs.) times:
• 10 if you are sedentary • 15 if you are active • 18 if you are very active and lean This formula will give you the required amount of calories needed each day to function.
Record One way to get a good estimate of your metabolic rate is to record your
caloric intake for two to three weeks. If your bodyweight has not changed during the two to three week period, you simply take the daily average and use this average as your metabolic rate. Your metabolic rate represents the number of calories that you need to maintain your bodyweight at your current level of activity.
![Page 173: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-25
Putting the Weight Control Plan Together
First The first step in putting together a nutritional program is to determine your
present caloric requirements or metabolic rate as described on page 2-25.
Second Next, you should determine your weight loss goals. Remember, weight loss
exceeding two pounds per week can be dangerous and are not recommended.
Your Goal Your goal should be to consume no more than 30 percent of your calories
from fat and no more than 10 percent of your calories from saturated fat. Approximately 20 percent of your calories should come from protein and 50 percent from carbohydrates.
Tracking If you are serious about losing some weight, it is important to write down
everything you eat and drink (if it contains calories). Your tracking method can be as complex or as simple as you want it to be. The key thing is that it is functional and you understand it.
Time Item Quantity Calories
0600 Eggs, boiled 2 215 0600 Orange Juice 8 ozs 15 0600 Grits 1 bowl/ 10 ozs 180 0630 Apple 1 10
Multiply Them Next, you multiply the total grams of carbohydrates and protein by four and
the grams of fat by nine to determine the calories from each nutrient. Then you divide the calories from each by the total calories to determine the percentage of calories from each nutrient.
Item Grams Multiply by Equals
Fat 10g 9 90 calories Carbohydrates 15g 4 60 calories Protein 15g 4 60 calories
210 calories total
Continued on next page
![Page 174: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-26
Putting the Weight Control Plan Together, Continued
Percentage of Calories
The table below shows how to compute the percentage of calories from each nutrient.
Item Calories Divide by total calories % of calories
Fat 90 210 43 Carbohydrates 60 210 26 Protein 60 210 26
Where to Receive the Information
The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) requires nutrition labels on most of the foods that you eat. The new nutrition label provides all of the information that is necessary to make wise choices about what to eat. You can determine the total calories from fats, carbohydrates, and protein and the amount of saturated, monounsaturated and polyunsaturated fat in a product.
Meals Now that you have determined how many calories needed to achieve your
weight loss goal, you should try to spread out your caloric intake over as many meals as possible. Six meals per day are recommended.
![Page 175: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-27
The Food Guide Pyramid
Bread, Cereal, Rice, and Pasta
These foods provide complex carbohydrates an important source of energy. They also provide B vitamins, minerals, and fiber. Starchy foods are not fattening if you do not add butter, cheese, or cream sauces. Select whole grain products to maximize fiber and other nutrients.
Fruits Fruits are rich sources of vitamins, most notably vitamin C. They are low in
fat and calories. Select fresh fruits and fruit juices, and frozen, canned, or dried fruits. Avoid fruit processed with heavy syrups and sugar-sweetened juices.
Vegetables Vegetables provide vitamins (especially A and C), are excellent sources of
fiber, and are naturally low in fat. For maximum nutrients, select dark leafy greens, deep-yellow or orange vegetables, and starchy vegetables like potatoes and yams.
Meat, Poultry, Fish, Dry Beans, Eggs, and Nuts
Meat and fish are excellent sources of protein, iron, zinc, and B vitamins, as are beans, nuts, and seeds. Tofu (made from soybeans) and white beans also supply calcium. Some seeds, like almonds, are good sources of vitamin E.
Milk, Yogurt, and Cheese
Milk products are the richest sources of calcium. They also provide protein and vitamin B12. Choose low-fat varieties to keep calories, cholesterol, and saturated fat at a minimum.
Continued on next page
![Page 176: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-28
The Food Guide Pyramid, Continued
Fats, Oils, and Sweets
Used sparingly, these foods provide calories, but little else nutritionally. Exceptions are vegetable oil, which is a rich source of vitamin E (one tablespoon is all you need), and molasses, an excellent source of iron.
Review the Process
Lastly, review the process of setting up a nutritional program • Determine your daily calorie intake (metabolic rate). • Subtract 500 calories a day, for a one-pound per week weight loss and
1,000 calories a day, for a two-pound per week weight loss. • Determine the percentage of your calories from fats, carbohydrates, and
protein. • Adjust total calories and the amount of fats, carbohydrates, and protein to
obtain the appropriate levels. • Spread your calories over five to six small meals instead of one to two big
meals.
Benefits Eating several meals a day helps to prevent hunger and stimulates your
metabolism. Research indicates that people actually eat less if they eat more often (provided that the snacks are not junk food). It may also help to prevent some muscle mass loss associated with reducing caloric intake.
Continued on next page
![Page 177: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 5-29
The Food Guide Pyramid, Continued
Food Guide Pyramid
Use the food guide pyramid below to get your recommended servings of each food group a day.
![Page 178: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise 5-30
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your
answer against those at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 Vitamins, minerals, water, fiber, protein, carbohydrates, and fat are the seven
basic categories of a. nutrients. b. supplements. c. energy. d. strength.
Item 2 What is the role of protein?
a. A source of energy b. A source nutrients c. A structural role in the body d. Supports the daily routine
Item 3 The role of carbohydrates is a
a. source of energy. b. structural role in the body. c. source of nutrients. d. source of cartilage.
Item 4 What does excess protein and carbohydrates turn into?
a. Sugars b. Protein c. Nutrients d. Fat
Continued on next page
![Page 179: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise 5-31
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 5 The role of fat is
a. structural role. b. source of energy that the body uses. c. daily supplement. d. source of strength.
Item 6 How many groups comprise the food guide pyramid?
a. Five b. Six c. Seven d. Eight
Continued on next page
![Page 180: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise 5-32
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions about these items, refer to the reference page.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 a 5-19 2 c 5-19 3 a 5-19 4 d 5-19 5 b 5-20 6 b 5-29
Summary In this lesson, you have learned about the seven basic nutrients and the food
guide pyramid. In the next lesson, you will learn about the remedial physical training program.
![Page 181: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 5-33
LESSON 4
REMEDIAL PHYSICAL TRAINING PROGRAM
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the knowledge needed to complete a remedial program
to loose weight, and to properly keep track of your process.
Learning Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you should be able to
• Identify the applicable references for the remedial programs.
• Identify the applicable references for the personal appearance program.
• State the maximum recommended weight loss (in pounds) per week.
• State the minimum recommended caloric intake for normal adults.
• State three undesirable effects of starvation diets and fasting.
• State the daily caloric deficit necessary to produce a one to two-pound weight loss per week.
• List the four important components of a weight loss program.
• State the primary determinant of your resting metabolic rate.
Continued on next page
![Page 182: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 5-34
Introduction, Continued
Learning Objectives, continued
• Identify the effectiveness of using sweat suits or sauna suits to loose weight.
• Identify the concept of “spot reduction.” • Identify the effectiveness of “spot reduction.” • Identify the disadvantage of using only the scale to determine weight loss
progress. • Identify the basic principle behind body circumference measurement, skin
fold calipers, hydrostatic weighing, bioelectrical impedance, and near infrared interacted as methods of estimating body fat percentage.
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 5-33 References 5-35 Losing Pounds 5-36 Four Components 5-37 Ineffective Methods of Losing Weight 5-38 How to Measure Your Weight Loss 5-39 Lesson 4 Exercise 5-41
![Page 183: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 5-35
References
General Applicable references for remedial and personal appearance programs are
listed in the table below:
Reference Description MCO 6100.12 Marine Corps Physical Fitness Test And Body
Composition Program Manual MCO P1900.16F Separation and Retirement Manual MCO P1610.7E Performance Evaluation System MCO P1070.12K Individual Records Administration Manual MCO P1080.35F Personnel Reporting Instructions Manual MCO 5000.12D Pregnancy and Parenthood
![Page 184: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 5-36
Losing Pounds
Weight Loss The American College of Sports Medicine recommends a calorie deficit of no
more than 500 to 1,000 calories daily. This would produce a weight loss of approximately one to two pounds per week.
Minimum Daily caloric intake of less than 1,200 for normal adults may lead to excessive
weight loss from tissues other than adipose (fat) tissue. These losses may include a significant loss of muscle mass, muscle, and liver glycogen and a reduction in blood volume and body fluids.
Starvation Starvation diets (diets that have insufficient calories to sustain life) and
fasting has been associated with weakness, fainting, and also congestive heart failure and death.
![Page 185: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 5-37
Four Components
Moderate Caloric Reduction
Once you have determined your daily caloric requirements at your current body weight, you should reduce your daily caloric intake by 500 to 1,000 calories per day.
Aerobic Exercise
Since aerobic exercises are continuous in nature they tend to burn more calories per unit of time than other types of exercise.
Strength Training
The biggest variable component of lean body mass is muscle mass. When people try to lose weight by dieting alone, they tend to lose lean body mass. In fact, if you lose weight too rapidly (more than two pounds per week), 50 percent or more of the weight loss can come from lean body mass.
Low-Fat Diet When you eat low-fat foods, you can eat more and consume fewer calories.
Since it is total calories that will determine whether you lose weight or not, this is an important consideration. High-fat foods are very calorically dense. In other words, they contain lots of calories for very little food.
Resting Heart Rate
Your total lean body mass is the primary determinant of your resting metabolic rate. Remember, heart rate is beats per minute and the average resting heart rate is 60-70 beats per minute.
![Page 186: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 5-38
Ineffective Methods of Losing Weight
Sweat Suits and Saunas
The only thing you accomplish when you wear heavy sweat suits to induce sweating during exercise is a decrease in your exercise capacity. As a result, you exercise less and burn fewer calories. In addition, heavy sweat suits and sauna suits can cause heat stress injuries and dehydration.
Spot Reduction Spot reduction refers to the concept of working a specific area of the body in
an attempt to remove fat from that area. Spot reduction does not work. The problem is that depletion of fat stores is controlled by hormones and has nothing to do with which part of the body is being worked.
Eating Meals Eating smaller meals more often than not prevents hunger and preserves
energy levels and metabolism. People who skip meals often compensate by eating more later.
![Page 187: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 5-39
How to Measure Your Weight Loss
Scale While it would be easy to just jump on the scale and weigh yourself everyday,
this approach is not very productive. This is because you may be gaining muscle while losing fat. Your body weight will fluctuate by several pounds during the day. Weighing in first thing in the morning will give you the most consistent and most accurate results.
Body Circumference Measurement
A greater neck circumference is indicative of a more muscle mass while a greater abdominal circumference is indicative of more fat. The average error rate for body circumference method is 3.5 percent.
Skin Fold Calipers
This technique involves measuring skin fold thickness in several locations by pinching the skin with your fingers and using a set of calipers to measure the thickness of the fold. The average error for this technique is estimated to be 3 percent.
Hydrostatic Weighing
A body when immersed in water will be buoyed up by a force equal to the weight of the volume of water displaced. In practical terms, fat floats, lean mass sinks. A person with a high percentage of body fat will be heavy on land but light in the water because fat floats and gives him extra buoyancy. The average error for hydrostatic weighing is estimated to be plus or minus 1.5 percent.
Near Infrared Interactance
Infrared methods of determining body composition are based on light absorption and reflectance. A near infrared light probe is placed on specific body sites. Some of the infrared light is absorbed and some is reflected, based on light absorption, body composition can be determined. This method is not considered to be very accurate, it has been shown to under and over predict body fat percentage in some individuals by over 4 percent.
Continued on next page
![Page 188: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 5-40
How to Measure Your Weight Loss, Continued
Bioelectrical Impedance
There are several types of bioelectrical impedance devices available. The principle use is that of electrical current resistance. Fat is a poor conductor of electricity while lean mass is a good conductor. Therefore, the higher the impedance values, the higher the percentage of body fat. If done properly bioelectrical impedance has an average error of plus or minus 3 percent.
Bioelectrical Reading for Accuracy
To obtain an accurate reading, you must • Abstain from eating and drinking within 4 hours of the test. • Avoid exercising within 12 hours of the test. • Urinate completely prior to testing. • Do not drink alcohol within 48 hours of the test. • Avoid taking diuretics prior to testing unless instructed by your physician.
![Page 189: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise 5-41
Lesson 4 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 23 by performing the action required. Check your
answer against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 Select the applicable order for Marine Corps Physical Fitness Test and Body
Composition Program Manual. a. MCO 6100.12 b. MCO 6100.3K c. MCO P1900.16F d. MCO P1610.7E
Item 2 Select the applicable order for pregnancy and parenthood.
a. MCO 6100.10B b. MCO 6100.12 c. MCO 5000.12D d. MCO P1080.35F
Item 3 Select the applicable order for the separation and retirement manual.
a. MCO 6100.10B b. MCO 6100.12 c. MCO P1900.16F d. MCO P1610.7E
Continued on next page
![Page 190: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise 5-42
Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued
Item 4
What is the maximum amount of pounds recommended to lose per week? a. One b. Two c. Three d. Four
Item 5 Identify the minimum recommended caloric intake for normal adults.
a. 1,400 b. 1,300 c. 1,200 d. 1,100
Item 6 Identify one of the three undesirable effects of starvation diets and fasting.
a. Weight gain b. Strength gain c. Endurance gain d. Congestive heart failure
Item 7 What is the daily caloric deficit necessary to produce a one to two pound
weight loss per week? a. 100 to 200 b. 250 to 750 c. 500 to 1,000 d. 1,000 to 2,000
Continued on next page
![Page 191: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise 5-43
Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued
Item 8 What is one of the four important components of a weight loss program?
a. High-fat diet b. Low-fat diet c. High carbohydrates d. High protein
Item 9 What is the primary determinant of your resting heart rate?
a. Body endurance b. Strength c. Lean body mass d. High-fat foods
Item 10 The only effective thing heavy sweat suits and sauna does to induce weight
loss is a. produces weight loss. b. produces strength. c. decreases sweat. d. decreases your exercise capacity.
Item 11 What is spot reduction?
a. Working out at a specific facility b. Working a specific area of the body c. Ceasing to eat specific foods d. Skipping meals
Item 12 What is the effectiveness of spot reduction?
a. Nothing b. Lose weight fast c. Tone the area d. Lose fat from the area
Continued on next page
![Page 192: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise 5-44
Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued
Item 13 What is an advantage of eating frequent small meals?
a. Creates more strength b. Causes weight gain c. Lose energy d. Prevents hunger
Item 14 What is one of the disadvantages of using only the scale to weigh yourself?
a. You cannot find one b. You may be gaining muscle while losing fat c. You get one reading only d. There is no height measurement
Item 15 What is the principle of body circumference measurement?
a. Measuring the body by immersing it in water b. Measuring the thickness of the skin by pinching it c. Measuring the body’s fat using light absorption d. Measuring the body’s neck and abdomen
Item 16 What is the principle of hydrostatic weighing?
a. Measuring the body by immersing it in water b. Measuring the thickness of the skin by pinching it c. Measuring the body’s fat using light absorption d. Measuring the body’s neck and abdomen
Item 17 What is the principle of skin fold calipers?
a. Measuring the body by immersing it in water b. Measuring the thickness of the skin by pinching it c. Measuring the body’s fat using light absorption d. Measuring the body’s neck and abdomen
Continued on next page
![Page 193: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise 5-45
Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued
Item 18 What is the principle of near infrared interactance?
a. Measuring the body by immersing it in water b. Measuring the thickness of the skin by pinching it c. Measuring the bodies fat using light absorption d. Measuring the bodies neck and abdomen
Item 19 What is the principle of bioelectrical impedance?
a. Measuring the body by immersing it in water b. Measuring the thickness of the skin by pinching it c. Measuring the bodies fat using light absorption d. Measuring the bodies weight through electrical current resistance
Item 20 What is the percentage amount of accuracy for skin fold measurement?
a. 1.5 percent b. 3 percent c. 3.5 percent d. 4 percent
Item 21 What is the percentage amount of accuracy for the body circumference
measurement? a. 1.5 percent b. 3 percent c. 3.5 percent d. 4 percent
Item 22 What is the percentage amount of accuracy for the near infrared interactance?
a. 1.5 percent b. 3 percent c. 3.5 percent d. 4 percent
Continued on next page
![Page 194: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise 5-46
Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 a 5-35 2 c 5-35 3 c 5-35 4 b 5-36 5 c 5-36 6 d 5-36 7 c 5-37 8 b 5-37 9 c 5-37 10 d 5-38 11 b 5-38 12 a 5-38 13 d 5-38 14 b 5-39 15 d 5-39 16 a 5-39 17 b 5-39 18 c 5-39 19 d 5-40 20 b 5-39 21 c 5-39 22 d 5-39
Summary In this lesson, you learned about remedial physical training programs,
personal appearance, dieting, weight loss, and how to properly track your progress.
![Page 195: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-1 Study Unit 6
STUDY UNIT 6
PERSONNEL RECORDS
Overview
Estimated Study Time
1 hour, 45 minutes
Unit Scope This study unit discusses the evaluation of an individual Marine’s
performance records. It also outlines methods to audit and correct these important documents.
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you should be able to • Identify documents that are used to audit performance evaluation records. • Identify methods to correct fitness reports. • Identify Service Record accountability and audit requirements.
In This Study Unit
This study unit contains the following lessons:
Topic See Page
Lesson 1 Performance Evaluation System (PES) Audit Procedures 6-3 Lesson 2 Correcting Fitness Reports 6-19 Lesson 3 Personnel Record Accountability and Audit Procedures 6-29
![Page 196: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-2 Study Unit 6
(This page intentionally left blank.)
![Page 197: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-3 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1
LESSON 1
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION SYSTEM (PES) AUDIT PROCEDURES
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
35 minutes
Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP), which
entails the evaluation of two key documents: the Master Brief Sheet (MBS) and the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF).
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Explain the purpose of the Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP). • Identify references that contain information on Performance Records. • State the purpose of the Master Brief Sheet. • Identify the two sections of the Master Brief Sheet. • Identify correcting authorities of the Master Brief Sheet header data. • Identify the Fitness Report Listing section of the Master Brief Sheet. • State the purpose of the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF). • Identify different folders of the OMPF. • Identify the procedure to audit and correct OMPF folders.
Continued on next page
![Page 198: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-4 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1
Introduction, Continued
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 6-3 Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP) 6-5 Auditing the Master Brief Sheet (MBS) 6-8 Auditing the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF) 6-12 Lesson Exercise 1 6-14
![Page 199: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-5 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1
Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP)
Introduction The Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP) is the Marine Corps program to
ensure accuracy of Marines' performance records. There are two related performance records maintained by Headquarters Marine Corps (HQMC): • Master Brief Sheet (MBS) • Official Military Personnel File (OMPF) These important records must be kept current and correct in every detail because they become pillars of good personnel management decisions made at HQMC.
Purpose of the FRAP
The Marine Corps developed the Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP) to provide a process for Marines. It ensures accuracy and completeness of performance records by periodically placing them in the hands of individual Marines. The FRAP process ensures continual reliability of the MBS and OMPF.
Support Functions of the FRAP
The following are support functions of the FRAP: • Reports date gaps via the command’s Unit Diary advisory date gap
notification process. • Provides opportunity for Marines to periodically request and audit
performance records. • Informs Marines of any action required to correct records or recover
missing reports.
Continued on next page
![Page 200: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-6 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1
Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP), Continued
MBS Mail Out Sergeants and above receive a mailing of the MBS annually based on the last
digit of their social security number. Marines on active duty will have their MBS sent to their military address. Marines not on active duty will have their MBS mailed to their homes of record. Accurate and up-to-date information in the Marine Corps Total Force System (MCTFS) is essential for timely receipt of MBS.
Example Marines whose social security number ends with
• Two receive their MBS in February • Six receive their MBS in June • Zero receive their MBS in October
OMPF Mail Out
Upon completion of a selection board, HQMC (MMSB-33) mails the OMPFs of Marines in the eligibility or below zone for that board. This is the only scheduled time HQMC automatically sends OMPFs to Marines. Marines should order their OMPFs and review them every 2 years. Marines planning to apply for such programs as the Warrant Officer, MECEP, or Active Reserve (AR), should order their OMPF at least 12 months in advance of the program to allow for any needed correction.
MBS and OMPF Request
Written requests can be submitted to the following address: Commandant of the Marine Corps (MMSB 10) Headquarters U.S. Marine Corps 2008 Elliot Road Quantico, VA 22134-5030 Submit FAX requests to: Commandant of the Marine Corps (MMSB-10) Headquarters U.S. Marine Corps DSN: 278-5792 or Comm (703) 784-5792 Note: Be sure to include name, grade, SSN, signature, and mailing address. Additionally, visit the Personnel Management Support Branch (MMSB) web site for additional information.
Continued on next page
![Page 201: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-7 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1
Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP), Continued
References Provided below is a list of references that pertains to performance records and
audit procedures. • MCO P1070.12_ Marine Corps Individual Records Administration
Manual (IRAM) • MCO P1080.40_ Marine Corps Total Force System Personnel Reporting
Instructions Manual (MCTFSPRIM) • MCO P1610.7_ Performance Evaluation System (PES) • MCO P1610.11_ Performance Evaluation Appeals
![Page 202: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-8 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1
Auditing the Master Brief Sheet (MBS)
Purpose of the MBS
The MBS is a ready reference document used in the personnel management process. The purpose of the MBS is to provide key personal data and a summary of a Marine’s performance evaluation record. The MBS has two sections: • Header Data • Fitness Report Listing
MBS Header Data
The header data provides service information extracted directly from the Marine Corps Total Force System (MCTFS).
Auditing the MBS Header Data
An audit of the MBS header data consists of comparing the information listed in each block against that of its source document. The block “Correcting MBS Header Data” gives a description of each item and the respective correcting authority.
Correcting MBS Header Data
Each of the items on the MBS is corrected via certain authorities. An illustration of the MBS header along with the MBS listing and correcting authorities are provided below:
MBS Listing Correcting Authority 1. Name Unit Diary 2. Social Security Number Unit Diary 3. Grade Enlisted Unit Diary 4. Rank Description Unit Diary
Continued on next page
![Page 203: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-9 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1
Auditing the Master Brief Sheet (MBS), Continued
Correcting MBS Header Data, continued
MBS Listing Correcting Authority
5. Date of Rank Enlisted Unit Diary 6. Component Enlisted Unit Diary 7. Lineal No CMC (MMPR) 8. Primary MOS Unit Diary 9. Additional MOS Enlisted Unit Diary 10. GT/GCT CMC (MA) 11. Permanent Grade CMC (MMPR) 12. Permanent Date of Rank CMC (MMPR) 13. Date of Birth Unit Diary 14. Date of Original Entry into the Armed Forces
Unit Diary
15. Pay Entry Base Date Enlisted Unit Diary 16. Armed Forces Active Duty Base Date Unit Diary 17. Active Naval Service Base Date CMC (MMPR) 18. ACC 1st Marine Corps Commission Unit Diary 19. Date of Rank 1st Commission Active CMC (MMPR)
Reserve Unit Diary 20. Date of Rank 1st Commission as an LDO CMC (MMPR) 21. Date Designated a Military Pilot Reserve CMC (RAM) 22. Date Current Active Duty Began Unit Diary 23. Service Date CMC (MMPR) 24. Expiration of Active Service Enlisted Unit Diary 25. Date Current Tour Began Unit Diary 26. Overseas Control Date Unit Diary 27. Contract/Legal Agreement Active CMC (MMOA) 28. Decorations Unit Diary 29. Military Education Unit Diary 30. Civilian Education Unit Diary 31. Languages CMC (MA) 32. Special Information N/A
![Page 204: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-10 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1
Auditing the Master Brief Sheet (MBS), Continued
Fitness Report Listing
This portion of the Master Brief Sheet (MBS) lists the Marine’s fitness reports starting from the rank of sergeant. This format makes it simple to view, analyze, and compare fitness report information. Provided below is an illustration of the Fitness Report Listing.
Breakdown of the Fitness Report Listing
The illustration and table below describes the breakdown of the Fitness Report Listing.
Section Listing Description A Monitored Command Marine’s assigned command Organization/School Specific command or unit to which the
Marine is assigned for duty Reporting Senior Name of the Marine’s Reporting Senior
B Duty Assignment Primary duty to which the Marine Reported On (MRO) has been assigned
Grade Marine’s grade on the fitness report Type Duty Type of the Marine’s duty on the fitness
report BILMOS Billet MOS of the duty to which the Marine
has been assigned Reviewing Officer Name of Marine’s Reviewing Officer
C OCC Occasion for submitting the report D Begin Date Beginning date of the reporting period
Continued on next page
![Page 205: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-11 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1
Auditing the Master Brief Sheet (MBS), Continued
Breakdown of the Fitness Report Listing, continued
Section Listing Description
End Date Ending date of the reporting period E Mission/Character/
Leadership/Intellect/ Eval Responsibility
Markings from the Performance Anchored Rating Scales per sections D, E, F, G, and H of the fitness report
F Promotion Reflects the RS promotion recommendation for the Marine Reported on (an X in the ACC column indicates recommendation for accelerated promotion)
G Report Summary COM Reflects whether or not the Marine has been
subject to commendatory material during reporting period
ADV Reflects whether or not the contents of the report constitute a derogatory evaluation of the Marine (an X indicates the report is adverse)
# RPTS @ PROC Reflects the number of fitness reports written by the RS on Marines of the same grade as the MRO as of the time of processing the MROs report
REL VAL @ PROC Relative value of the MRO fitness report based on the RSs rating history for Marines of the same grade as the MRO as of the time of processing of the MROs report
# RPTS CUM Number of fitness reports written by the RS on Marines of the same grade as the MRO at the time the MROs MBS is printed
REL VAL CUM Relative value of the MROs fitness report based on the RSs rating history for Marines of the same grade as the MRO at the time the MROs MBS is printed
RO Concurs Whether the Reviewing Officer (RO) concurs or does not concur with the RS’s evaluation of the MRO
![Page 206: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-12 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1
Auditing the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF)
Purpose of the OMPF
The OMPF provides a history of the Marine’s career from entrance into the Marine Corps until the present. Administrative materials or documents to support the chronology of events for the Marine’s history are incorporated in the OMPF.
Structure of OMPF
The OMPF is structured into the following areas: • Service Folder (S Folder) • Commendatory/Derogatory Folder (C Folder) • Performance Folder (P Folder) • Field Folder/OQR/SRB (F Folder) • Health/Dental Folder (H Folder)
S Folder (Service)
Consists of contract information, discharge documents, reserve documents, orders to active duty, and general administrative, and service documents used to compute service time for benefits, programs, or retirement.
C Folder (Commenda-tory/Deroga-tory)
This folder contains documents on civilian and military education, personal awards information, courts-martial/non-judicial punishments, and other material reflecting personal achievement or adversity that is pertinent to making decisions for purposes of selection, assignment, and retention.
P Folder (Performance)
Contains fitness reports and standard addendum pages for all sergeants and above.
F Folder (Field OQR/ SRB)
Upon separation from the Marine Corps, documents contained in the Service Record Book/Officer Qualification Record (SRB/OQR) are filed in the Service Folder. If a Marine has periods of broken service, documents from previous OQR/SRBs will be contained in the Field Folder.
Continued on next page
![Page 207: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-13 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1
Auditing the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF), Continued
H Folder (Health/ Dental)
Unless a Marine had broken service, which ended before 1994, or is presently on the Temporary Disability Retired List (TDRL), no health folder is maintained. Following discharge, health and dental records are sent to Department of Veteran Affairs P.O. Box 150950 St. Louis, MO 63115
Incorporating Material into OMPF
All material forwarded to the CMC (MMSB) for inclusion in the OMPF must contain the grade, full name, and SSN. The mailing address is CMC (MMSB-20) 1008 Elliot Road, Quantico, VA 22134-5030
Audit of the OMPF
The OMPF is the primary record used by selection boards. The section on the “FRAP” provides information on when OMPF’s are automatically provided to Marines. However Marines should request a copy of their OMPF for review and correction under the following circumstances: • At least once every 2 years • At least 12 months prior to the convening of a selection board, when
eligible • At least 12 months prior to applying for programs such as Warrant
Officer, Marine Corps Enlisted Commissioning Education Program, etc.
Correcting the OMPF
If information not pertaining to the Marine is found in the OMPF during the audit, the Marine should request removal of the information by submitting a written request to CMC (MMSB-10).
Board for Correction of Naval Records (BCNR)
Marines may petition the Board for Correction of Naval Records (BCNR) to remove documents on file in the OMPF, which they consider adverse, unjust, and inaccurate.
![Page 208: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-14 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 17 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 What is the purpose of the Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP)?
a. Gives Marines an opportunity to vent b. Provides insight on the Marine Corps Total Force System (MCTFS) c. Provides a process for Marines to ensure the accuracy and completeness
of performance records d. Places performance records in the hands of the Responsible Officer (RS)
Item 2 Which of the following are references that contain information on
performance records? a. MCO P1070.12_ Marine Corps Individual Records Administration
Manual (IRAM) b. MCO P1610.7_ Performance Evaluation System (PES) c. MCO P1080.40_ Marine Corps Total Force System Personnel Reporting
Instructions Manual (MCTFSPRIM) d. All of the above
Item 3 The purpose of the Master Brief Sheet (MBS) is to
a. provide key personal data and a summary of a Marine’s performance
evaluation record. b. provide a listing of a Marine’s fitness report from most recent to oldest. c. explain in detail all responsible officer remarks. d. provide statistical data of a Marine’s proficiency and conduct.
Continued on next page
![Page 209: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-15 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 4 Which are two sections of the Master Brief Sheet?
a. Top and bottom section b. Header data and responsible officer remarks c. Header data and fitness report listing d. Correcting authority and master brief sheet listing
Item 5 Name, social security number, and rank description on the Master Brief Sheet
are corrected via a. CMC (MMPR) b. CMC (MA) c. Active CMC (MMOA) d. The unit diary
Items 6 Through 10
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the description from column 2 that best describes the listing in column 1. The answers in column 2 may not be used more than once. Column 1 Column 2 Listing Description ___ 6. OCC a. Number of fitness reports written by ___ 7. Organization/School RS on Marines of same grade as ___ 8. Promotion MRO as of time of processing report ___ 9. #RPTS @ PROC b. RS promotion recommendation ___ 10. REL VAL @ PROC c. Command or unit to which the Marine was assigned for duty d. Occasion for submitting report e. Relative value of the MRO fitness report based on the RSs rating history for Marines of the same grade as the MRO
Continued on next page
![Page 210: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-16 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 11 The OMPF provides a(n) ______ of the Marine’s ______ from entrance into
the Marine Corps until the present. a. analysis, statistics b. snapshot, data c. history, career d. report, production
Items 12 Through 16
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the description from column 2 that best describes the folder in column 1. The answers in column 2 may not be used more than once. Column 1 Column 2 Folder Description ___12. Commendatory/Derogatory a. Documents on civilian and military ___13. Performance education, personal awards, and other ___14. Field material pertinent to selection, ___15. Service assignment, and retention decisions ___16. Health/Dental b. Unless broken service, no records are held c. Contract information, discharge documents, reserve documents, orders to active duty, and general administra- tiveand service documents to compute or service time for benefits program or retirement d. Fitness reports and standard addendum pages for sergeants and above e. Contains documents from previous OQR/SRBs if a Marine has periods of broken service
Continued on next page
![Page 211: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-17 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 17 Marines should request a copy of their OMPF for review and correction under
which circumstance? a. At least once every two years b. At least 12 months prior to the convening board c. At least 12 months prior to applying for programs such as Warrant Officer
and Marine Corps Enlisted Commissioning Education Program d. All of the above
Continued on next page
![Page 212: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-18 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 c 6-5 2 d 6-7 3 a 6-8 4 c 6-8 5 d 6-8 6 d 6-10 7 c 6-10 8 b 6-11 9 a 6-11 10 e 6-11 11 c 6-12 12 a 6-12 13 d 6-12 14 e 6-12 15 c 6-12 16 b 6-13 17 d 6-13
![Page 213: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-19 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2
LESSON 2
CORRECTING FITNESS REPORTS
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope The purpose of this lesson is to identify the role of Headquarters Marine
Corps (HQMC) in the Performance Evaluation System (PES). We will also discuss actions to take in order to correct fitness report records.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify the role of the Performance Evaluation Section (PES) of the
Personnel Management Support Branch. • Identify steps taken to request administrative corrections of fitness
reports. • Identify steps taken to correct date gaps caused by missing fitness reports.
In This Lesson The lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 6-19 Headquarters Marine Corps Functions 6-20 Correction of Fitness Report Records 6-22 Lesson 2 Exercise 6-25
![Page 214: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-20 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2
Headquarters Marine Corps Functions
Performance Evaluation Section (MMSB) Role
The Performance Evaluation Section (MMSB 30) of the Personnel Management Support Branch (MMSB) HQMC implements performance evaluation policy and procedures, and collects, maintains, and provides essential data to support CMC’s personnel management responsibilities (including assignment, retention, and promotion of Marines).
Organization The Performance Evaluation Section is organized into the primary functional
units of Policy and Research, Fitness Report Processing, and Reserve Matters. The descriptions of these units in the following blocks provide a better understanding of available support.
Policy and Research Unit (MMSB 31)
This unit is responsible for fitness report policy, research, correction, and accountability for all active duty personnel.
Fitness Report Processing Unit (MMSB 32)
This unit is responsible for initial screening and processing of all fitness reports into the automated system, forwarding correct reports to the CMC (MMSB 20) for inclusion in the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF), and providing liaison for MMSB board support.
Reserve Matters Unit (MMSB 34)
This unit specifically monitors Reserve Component issues and manages fitness report matters that are unique to Reserve organizations and functions.
USMC Fitness Report Processing
Throughout the Marine Corps, performance evaluation responsibilities include ensuring fitness reports are administratively, procedurally correct, and processed into the automated system by the Fitness Report Processing Unit (MMSB 32). Some specific tasks include the following: • Ensuring reports are administratively correct. • Auditing fitness reports for adherence to policy. • Entering fitness reports into the database and ensuring their accuracy. • Reconstructing those reports which are missing from the OMPF. • Preparing the correspondence necessary for follow-up action to correct
erroneous reports.
Continued on next page
![Page 215: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-21 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2
Headquarters Marine Corps Functions, Continued
Fitness Report Accountability
Furthermore, the Fitness Report Processing Unit is responsible to help Marines ensure their fitness report records are complete, current, and preparing correspondence as necessary to obtain any missing reports. Specific tasks include the following: • Supervising policies regarding accountability of required fitness reports
and audits of fitness report records • Providing unit diary notification to reporting units concerning date gaps
for all Marines
Identifying Mistakes
When performance evaluation mistakes are found, the Fitness Report Processing Unit is responsible to correct all identified errors on fitness reports prior to processing the report or upon identification of errors in existing performance evaluation records.
Making Corrections
Finally, whenever they occur, the Fitness Report Processing Unit is responsible to correct all identified errors on fitness reports before processing the report. Specific tasks include the following: • Correcting administrative errors at HQMC if possible • Returning reports to the field for correction
• The Performance Evaluation section will return these reports to the Reviewing Officer (RO) for distribution.
• All returned reports will include a notation sheet with an explanation
of why the report is being returned.
![Page 216: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-22 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2
Correction of Fitness Report Records
Authority The Commandant of the Marine Corps (CMC) has the authority to correct
fitness report records when the errors are limited solely to factual matters and when documentary evidence indicates that the record contains erroneous information. Requests to correct these reports are forwarded through a specific process.
Administrative Corrections
CMC has the authority to correct section A information and statements of fact in sections B, C, I, and K that are completely devoid of thought and significance.
Requesting Administrative Corrections
Requests for administrative corrections should be submitted as follows:
Step Action
1 The Marine must submit the request via one of the reporting officials identified on the original report (preferably the Reporting Senior).
2 The RS or RO must endorse the request indicating only those changes, which are valid and provide documentation as applicable.
3 Forward the endorsed correspondence to the CMC (MMSB 31) for Active component Marines or (MMSB 34) for Reserve Component Marines.
Note: Anticipate at least 120 days from the time of receipt at HQMC for completion of the requested corrections.
Substantive Corrections
All other corrections are inherently judgmental. The Secretary of the Navy, acting through the Board for Correction of Naval Records (BCNR), can approve a revised assessment of a Marine’s conduct or performance based entirely on facts about the Marine that were unknown when the original report was prepared.
Continued on next page
![Page 217: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-23 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2
Correction of Fitness Report Records, Continued
Supplemental Comments
Situations may occur after submission of a fitness report in which the RS or RO is subsequently made aware of new facts that reflect upon the performance of the Marine during a specific reporting period. Reporting officials may forward a request for inclusion of supplemental comments into official records. To make such a request, the RS or RO must • Submit the comments on an addendum page; include a cover letter that
identifies the new information and provides justification for its inclusion into the report.
• Limit requests solely to factual matters with the documentary evidence as
appropriate, indicating the previously missing information.
Missing Fitness Reports
To ensure each sergeant and above has a complete fitness report record on file is a shared responsibility. • CMC will notify reporting units via unit diary advisories to identify date
gaps for all Marines. • Commanding officers, senior enlisted advisors, and reporting officials,
must assist Marines in correcting incomplete fitness reports. • Individual Marines have a responsibility to periodically audit their records
especially in advance of eligibility before a particular selection board and prior to reenlistment.
• Date gaps of 30 days or less are not significant and do not require
correction.
Late Fitness Reports
Fitness reports are due to the CMC (MMSB 32) within 30 days of the end of the reporting period. Although late submission is not recommended, it does not render a fitness report invalid.
Continued on next page
![Page 218: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-24 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2
Correction of Fitness Report Records, Continued
Problem of Date Gaps In Fitness Reports
Date gaps occur when there is a lapse in the reporting period. These gaps may occur for any number of reasons. Nonetheless, it is the responsibility of the Marine to take action to get the discrepancy corrected. Failure to correct date gaps in the reporting period may delay a Marine’s promotion to the next rank.
Correcting Date Gaps
To warrant correction of date gaps, the date gap must be 31 days or longer. The table below illustrates the steps to be taken in order to correct date gaps between fitness reports.
Step Action
1 Exhaust all means to locate the RS. 2 Complete section A of a fitness report form with the exception of
items 5 through 8. 3 Send the completed section A attached with cover letter, to the RS
requesting he or she complete the fitness report. 4 The RS must forward the completed report to the CMC (MMSB-
31) or (MMSB-34) and provide a copy to the Marine. 5 If the RS fails to respond within 30 days, forward a copy of the
correspondence originally sent to the RS soliciting the fitness report and an original fitness report with items 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, and 11 of section A completed to the CMC (MMSB-31) or (MMSB-34).
6 If you cannot locate the RS, forward an original fitness report with items 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, and 11 of section A completed to the CMC (MMSB-31 or MMSB-34). Include in the letter any known information that may help locate the RS or RO.
Note: Different actions are required based on the length of time:
- If the report is over 1 year old, only the RS signature is needed.
- If the report is less than 1 year old, RS and RO signature (certified true copy) of original report are needed.
![Page 219: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-25 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
5 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 4 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 The Performance Evaluation Section (PES) of the Personnel Management
Support Branch (MMSB) provides essential data to _____ CMC’s personnel management responsibilities. a. enhance b. influence c. support d. maximize
Item 2 Policy and Research Unit (MMSB-31) is responsible for fitness report policy,
research, correction, and accountability for all a. officers only. b. reserve Marines. c. enlisted Marines. d. active duty personnel.
Item 3 Which of the personnel listed below are authorized to endorse fitness reports
that require administrative corrections? a. Reporting Senior (RS) b. Reviewing Officer (RO) c. Administrative Officer (AO) d. a and b e. a, b, and c
Continued on next page
![Page 220: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-26 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 4 To warrant a correction of a date gap, the date gap must be how many days
delinquent? a. 31 days or longer b. 31 days or less c. 30 days or more d. 30 days or less
Continued on next page
![Page 221: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-27 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 c 6-20 2 d 6-20 3 d 6-22 4 a 6-24
![Page 222: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/222.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-28 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
![Page 223: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/223.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-29 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3
LESSON 3
PERSONNEL RECORD ACCOUNTABILITY AND AUDIT PROCEDURES
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
20 minutes
Lesson Scope This lesson will discuss the importance of conducting an audit for the Basic
Individual Record (BIR) and Basic Training Record (BTR). It will also discuss the occasions to conduct an audit and action taken to incorporate changes.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify components of the Basic Individual Record (BIR). • Identify components of the Basic Training Record (BTR). • Identify occasions to audit the BIR and BTR. • Explain action to correct the BIR and BTR.
In This Lesson The lesson contains the following topics:
Topic See Page Introduction 6-29 Personnel Records 6-30 Maintaining Personnel Records 6-32 Lesson 3 Exercise 6-34
![Page 224: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/224.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-30 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3
Personnel Records
Marine Corps Total Force System (MCTFS)
The Marine Corps Total Force System (MCTFS) is the single, integrated, personnel and pay system supporting both active and reserve components of the Marine Corps, and personnel management for all Marines. The MCTFS maintains more than 500,000 active, reserve and retiree records that are available to be processed for pay purposes, personnel management, or for the production of necessary management reports.
Reporting Purposes
The data collection of the MCTFS is based on the principle of singular reporting. An item of information is entered into the system only once; thereafter, only updates, deletions, or corrections to this information are reported.
MCTFS Database
The MCTFS central database is maintained by Defense Finance and Accounting Service (DFAS), Kansas City Center and contains all data elements resident in the MCTFS. Records containing specified data elements for all military personnel (active and reserve components, to include retirees) comprise the Central Master File (CMF).
Manpower Information System (MIS)
The Manpower Information System (MIS) encompasses the tasks and functions required to maintain and utilize accurate records in the MCTFS databases. These tasks and functions include verifying records through the audit of • Basic Individual Record (BIR) • Basic Training Record (BTR) • Daily Retrieval System (DRS) • Record of Emergency Data (RED) • Record of Service (ROS) • MOS Record (TMOS) • Education Record (EDU) • Awards Record (AWDS) • Career Retirement Credit Report (CRCR) • Performance Evaluation Record For the purpose of this lesson, we will discuss audit procedures of the BIR and BTR, the two most important and comprehensive records in the system.
Continued on next page
![Page 225: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/225.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-31 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3
Personnel Records, Continued
Significance of BIR and BTR
The BIR and BTR consist of personal information about the individual Marine. The significance of these records is that the information is collected from the initial enlistment to the present. It is important to maintain correct information. Incorrect information may delay a Marine’s promotion, or deny benefits to a dependent. For this reason, Marines are required to conduct audits of their records to prevent this from happening.
Components of BIR
The BIR is a listing of administrative information contained in the Central Master File (CMF) computer record of an individual Marine. The BIR is used to ensure that certain important data elements in the Marine’s record are correct. Components of the BIR include the following: • Header - SSN, Name, Present-Grade, etc. • Contract - Expiration of Active Service (EAS), Expiration of Current
Contract (ECC), Expiration of Obligated Service (EOS) etc. • Service – Present Grade Date of Rank, Select Grade/Date, T/O
number/Line number, etc. • Personal – Date of Birth, Citizenship, Religion, etc. • Record – Record Status, Reserve Record Status, Disputed Date/Data, etc. • Dependents – Marital Status, Dependent Certification Code, Service
Spouse SSN, etc.
Components of BTR
The format of the BTR is similar to the BIR; components of the BTR include the following: • Unit training –scores for the PFT, BST/EST, current rifle qualification,
current pistol qualification, etc. • Service training – security investigation date/type, level of security
clearance held, place of birth/state/county, etc • Service schools/Special Skills – service schools code/year, local schools • Test scores – classification/assignment test-type/date/raw scores, army
radio code, electrical/DP test, foreign language
![Page 226: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/226.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-32 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3
Maintaining Personnel Records
Significance Personnel records are the cornerstone of a Marine’s career. These records
give a current in-depth reflection of the Marine. They provide personal and training information that is crucial when analyzing a Marine’s career for promotion or retention. This is why it is important to ensure the accuracy and completeness of these files.
Audit Process Accuracy and completeness of both types of personnel records (audit) can
best be determined through personal interview with the individual Marine. Therefore, whenever practical, the audit will be conducted during an interview with the Marine and a designated auditor.
Assigning Auditors
The Reporting Unit (RU) will designate in writing Marines authorized to conduct audits. This designation shall be based upon the auditor’s knowledge of personnel records and familiarity with the audit process. Designation of auditors shall not be accomplished based upon billet assignment alone. Marines in the rank of Lance Corporal and above, and civilian personnel GS-04 and above may be assigned to conduct audits.
Occasions for Audit of BIR and BTR
Audit occasions are no longer based on the last digit of the Marine’s SSN or, for reserve personnel, the anniversary date. The following audit occasions are established as the minimum occasions for auditing personnel records. • Join Process Audit. Whenever joined by a Reporting Unit (RU) • Triennial Audit. At least once every three years from the date of the last
join process audit or triennial audit • Mobilization/Deployment Readiness Audit. For a deployment which is
anticipated to be 31 days or more in duration • Administrative Review. This is required for reserve personnel to include
those individuals serving on the Active Reserve Program or extended active duty
• Whenever the commander considers that an additional audit is necessary
The Marine will acknowledge the audit/interview by signing the BIR and BTR.
Continued on next page
![Page 227: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/227.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-33 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3
Maintaining Personnel Records, Continued
Annotations The audit official will annotate audit items with the correct information
whenever an error is detected. Auditors will also insert information for blank items and annotate items for which “none” is an appropriate response. If an item is “not applicable” to the Marine being audited, the auditor will insert “N/A.”
Corrective Action
Information on the printed BIR/BTR represents data in the Central Master File (CMF). Unit Diary entries will be used to report additions, deletions, and change missing or erroneous data. Some data cannot be corrected at the RU level. In this case, the RU will submit a request with supporting documentation to the required office for corrections.
Filing Status Upon completion of the audit, and after discrepancies have been corrected,
the updated BIR and BTR will be filed in the Service Record Book/Officer Qualification Record (SRB/OQR).
![Page 228: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/228.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-34 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
5 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 4 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 Which of the following are components of the Basic Individual Record
(BIR)? a. Name, SSN, EAS, and Record Status b. SSN, Marital Status, and Current Rifle Qualification c. Foreign Language, Record Status, and Date of Birth d. Army Radio Code, Service Spouse SSN, and Name
Item 2 Which of the following are components of the Basic Training Record (BTR)?
a. PFT, Service Schools Code/Year, and Dependent Certification Code b. BST/EST, Security Clearance Held, Citizenship, and Religion c. Current Pistol Qualification, Local Schools, and PFT d. T/O number/Line Number, Date of Birth, and Security Investigation/Type
Item 3 What are the occasions for conducting an audit of the BIR and BTR?
a. Based on the last digit of the Marine’s SSN b. When a Marine joins a unit and triennially c. When a Marine reenlists d. During an annual inspection
Continued on next page
![Page 229: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/229.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-35 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 4 To report additions and deletions, and change missing or erroneous data on
the BIR or BTR, __________ entries are made. a. historical data b. administrative c. central master file d. unit diary
Continued on next page
![Page 230: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/230.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 6-36 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference 1 a 6-31 2 c 6-31 3 b 6-32 4 d 6-33
![Page 231: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/231.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-1 Study Unit 7
STUDY UNIT 7
FILES, DIRECTIVES, AND PUBLICATIONS
Overview
Estimated Study Time
3 hours, 30 minutes
Scope This study unit will familiarize the staff noncommissioned officer (SNCO)
with an overview of the files and directives system. It describes how the files and directives system works and where these tools are located. As the resident expert, a SNCO is responsible for accessing and utilizing files and directives to assist in daily problem solving.
Learning Objectives
At the end of this study unit, you should be able to • Identify the requirements of the files and directives system.
• Identify correspondence standards and procedures.
• Identify the procedures for the distribution and maintenance of publications.
In This Study Unit
This study unit contains the following lessons.
Topic See Page
Lesson 1 Files and Directives 7-3 Lesson 2 Correspondence 7-21 Lesson 3 Publications 7-55
Continued on next page
![Page 232: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/232.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-2 Study Unit 7
(This page intentionally left blank)
![Page 233: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/233.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-3 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
LESSON 1
FILES AND DIRECTIVES
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
1 hour
Scope The lesson will familiarize the SNCO with how to use, organize, maintain,
and manage correspondence, files, and directives.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify the definition of a file.
• Identify two types of file folders.
• Identify the definition for standard subject identification codes (SSIC).
• Identify the purpose of SECNAVINST 5210.11D.
• Identify the standard subject identification codes code groups.
• Identify the definition of a directive.
• Identify the type of directives.
• Identify the criteria for identifying directives.
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.
Topic See Page Introduction 7-3 Files Management System 7-4 Standard Subject Identification Codes (SSIC) 7-6 Directives 7-13 Lesson 1 Exercise 7-17
![Page 234: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/234.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-4 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
File Management System
Definition A file is a collection of all correspondence in the form of standard letters,
endorsements, administrative action forms, naval messages, directive, and other government forms.
File Folders There are two types of folders used to file correspondence.
• Kraft “brown” folder is used for filing correspondence. • Manila folder is used for routing purposes or as a temporary case file.
Labels Each file folder has three labels:
• File identification label • Date label • Disposal action label
File Identification Label
The file identification label is placed in the top left corner of the file folder. It consists of the Standard Subject Identification code (SSIC) and subject title. • SSIC identifies the general or specific pieces of correspondence filed
inside the folder (1000-1999). • Subject title is the corresponding title of the SSIC (MILITARY
PERSONNEL).
Date Label The date label is placed in the top center of the file folder. It records the date
the file was opened and closed.
Continued on next page
![Page 235: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/235.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-5 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
File Management System, Continued
Open Date The opening date for a file is dated the day a file is established.
• All correspondence files, except for those dealing with money (fiscal), are
opened on a calendar year basis, for example: 1 January of each year. • Files pertaining to “money” or fiscal matters are opened on a fiscal year
basis, for example: 1 October of each year.
Close Date The closing date for a file is dated the day a file is closed.
• Closing dates are normally 31 December for files opened on a calendar
year basis. • Closing dates are normally 30 September for files opened on a fiscal year
basis.
Expansion Files Expansion files are opened when the
• Files accumulate ten or more pieces of correspondence with the same
SSIC • Files reach 3/4 of an inch capacity and must be closed • Open date for that specific SSIC folder reflects the date of the earliest
dated document in the new file • Open date for a new folder after a closed file reflects the date after the
previous file is closed
Disposal Action Label
The disposal action label is placed in the top right corner of the file folder. It records the retention period, disposal action, and the authority.
![Page 236: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/236.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-6 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
Standard Subject Identification Codes
Definition A standard subject identification code (SSIC) is a four- or five-digit number
assigned to the subject of a document. Each number within the digit represents a particular subject category or element. Personnel working with files, correspondence, and directives most commonly use the acronym SSIC.
Major Subject Groups
The Navy’s SSIC system is broken down into 13 major subject groups or categories. The following table identifies the major subject groups.
Major Subject Groups
• Military Personnel • Telecommunications • Operations and Readiness • Logistics • General Administration and
Management • Medicine and Dentistry • Financial Management
• Ordnance Material • Ships Design and Material • General Material • Facilities and Activities Ashore • Civilian Personnel • Aeronautical and Astronautical
Material
SECNAVINST 5210.11D
Secretary of the Navy Instruction (SECNAVIST) 5210.11D is the Navy’s File Maintenance Procedures and SSIC manual. Its purpose is to revise the Navy’s SSIC and file maintenance procedures. This instruction outlines the process for segregating and filing Navy and Marine Corps records and the single standard system of numbers and or letter symbols. This filing system is also used throughout the Navy for categorizing the subject classifying Navy and Marine Corps information.
Continued on next page
![Page 237: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/237.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-7 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued
Designators and Subject Matter
There are 13 major SSIC groups assigned, content descriptions, and numerical designator groups as described in the following table.
Standard Subject Identification Code Designators and Subject Matter
Designators General Category and Subject Matter
Military Personnel
1000 - 1999
Subjects relating solely to the administration of military personnel. • The following restrictions apply • Civilian personnel are included in the 12000 series • General personnel subjects relating to both civilian and military
personnel are included in the 5000 series Telecommunications
2000 - 2999
Subjects relating to • General communication matters • Communication systems and equipment Operations and Readiness
3000 - 3999
Subjects relating to such matters as • Operational plans • Fleet readiness • Operational training and readiness • Warfare techniques • Operational intelligence • Research and development • Geophysical and hydrographic support
Continued on next page
![Page 238: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/238.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-8 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued
Designators and Subject Matter, continued
Designators General Category and Subject Matter
Logistics Subjects relating to logistical support of the Navy and Marine Corps including
4000 - 4999 • Procurement • Supply control • Property redistribution • Disposal • Travel • Transportation
• Maintenance • Construction • Conversion • Production • Mobilization planning • Foreign military assistance
General Administration and Management
5000 - 5999
Subjects relating to the administration, organization, and management of the Department of the Navy, including • General personnel matter (Military and civilian) • Records management programs • Security • External services • Office automation • Publication and printing matters Medicine and Dentistry
6000 - 6999
Subjects relating to medical matters such • Physical fitness • General medicine • Special or preventative medicine • Dentistry • Medical equipment and supplies
Continued on next page
![Page 239: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/239.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-9 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued
Designators and Subject Matter, continued
Designators General Category and Subject Matter
Financial Management
7000 - 7999
Subjects relating to the financial administration of the Department of the Navy, including • Budgeting • Disbursing • Accounting • Auditing • Contract auditing • Industrial and other special financing matters • Statistical reporting Ordnance Material
8000 - 8999
Subjects relating to all types of ordnance material and weapons including • Ammunition • Explosives • Guided missiles of all types • Nuclear weapons • Fire control and optics • Combat vehicles • Underwater ordnance materials • Miscellaneous ordnance equipment Ships Design and Material
9000 - 9999
Subjects relating to such matters as • The design and characteristics of ships • Ships material and equipment
Continued on next page
![Page 240: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/240.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-10 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued
Designators and Subject Matter, continued
Designators General Category and Subject Matter
General Material
1000 - 10999
Sujects relating to general categories of materials not included in the specialized material groups. For example • Audiovisual / graphic arts / photographic / television / video
equipment and accessories • General machinery • Tools • Materials personnel • Miscellaneous categories Facilities and Activities Ashore
11000 - 11999
Subjects relating to • Ashore structures and facilities • Fleet facilities • Transportation facilities • Heavy equipment • Utilities and services • Other similar subjects Civilian Personnel
12000 - 12999 Subjects relating solely to the administration of civilian personnel.
Continued on next page
![Page 241: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/241.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-11 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued
Designators and Subject Matter, continued
Designators General Category and Subject Matter
Aeronautical and Astronautical Material
13000 - 13999
Subjects relating to aeronautical and astronautical material such as • Parts • Accessories • Instruments • Special Devices • Armament • Aerological equipment • Weapons systems • Types of aircraft • Astronautical vehicles
Construction The table shows one of the 13 major subject groups broken down into primary,
secondary, and tertiary subdivisions.
5000 General Administration and
Management
Major Subject Group Code
5200 Management Programs and Techniques
Primary Subject is designated by the last three digits of the code number
5210 Records Management
Secondary Subject is designated by the last two digits
5211 Filing, Maintenance, Protection,
Retrieval, and Privacy Act Systems
Tertiary Subject is designated by the last digit
Assignment When a document is created, include the SSIC that closely describes the document’s
subject. Consider the subject, purpose, significance, and the manner in which the documents are requested.
Continued on next page
![Page 242: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/242.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-12 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued
Numbering System
The following graphic representation supports SSIC concepts.
5000 5200
5300 5400
5500 5600
5700 5800
5909
• Group Category/General Administration and Management
• Management Programs and Techniques • Manpower/Personnel
• Organizations, Functions, and Status
• Micrographics Publications, Printing, Duplicating • Security
• External and Internal Relations • Laws and Legal Matters
• Office Services
5211
5212 5213
52145215
521652175218
5219
• Filing, Maintenance, Retrieval, and Privacy Act
• Records Disposal Systems • Forms Management • Reports Management
• Correspondence Management • Issuance Systems
• Effective Writing • Mail Management
5210
5220 5230
5240 5250 5270 5280 5290
• Records Management
• Workload/Performance Measurement
• Automatic Data Processing & Info. Systems • Industrial Methods
• Management Sciences • Office Information Systems Management
• Operational Analysis • Audiovisual
Management
• Publications Management
![Page 243: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/243.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-13 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
Directives
Definition A directive is a formal written communication from the unit commander that
• Establishes or revises policy • Delegates authority or assigns responsibility • Assigns a mission, function, or task • Issues plans or programs • Directs courses of action or conduct • Regulates administrative practices • Establishes a procedure, standard, or method of performing a duty,
function, or task • Modifies, changes, or cancels another directive
Directive Formats
In accordance with MCO 5215.1H, Marine Corps Directives, HQMC staff agencies and authorized field commanders shall write directives in the “Five Paragraph Order format,” wherever and whenever feasible, to adhere to the Commandant’s Policy memorandum number 3-00 dated 25 June 2000. This policy memorandum is an enclosure in MCO 5215.1H.
Types of Directives
The different types of directive are • Orders • Bulletins • Messages
Continued on next page
![Page 244: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/244.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-14 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
Directives, Continued
Orders Orders are directives of continuing authority or reference value. It is directed
at overall functions and is effective for 9 years unless it is superseded or canceled. An order is assigned a consecutive point number that follows the SSIC. There are two types of orders, letter-type and manual-type.
Letter-Type Letter-type is an instruction or notice prepared in a format similar to that of
the naval letter. It may contain a cancellation date to reduce its effective period to less than 9 years.
Manual-Type Manual-type is referred to frequently; it has a promulgation page, a change
page, and a locator page. In addition to a consecutive point number following the SSIC, the letter “P” will precede the SSIC of a manual-type order.
Bulletins Bulletins are directives with the same force and effect as an order. It is used
to publish material that is either primarily informative or otherwise directive in nature. Bulletins are not of a continuing authority or reference; it has a self-cancellation date, which limits its effectiveness to one year.
Messages Message directives are used when promulgation and transmittal of an order,
bulletin, or change to either is so urgent that it must be disseminated through the Naval Telecommunications System (radio teletype). An example is the All Marine (ALMAR) message.
Continued on next page
![Page 245: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/245.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-15 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
Directives, Continued
Identification of Orders
Orders are identified by the following criteria: • The originating echelon of command is abbreviated. For example,
Headquarters Marine Corps is MC, battalion is Bn, regiment is Regt. • The letter “O” follows the issuing command to distinguish an order from a
bulletin. For example, MCO, BnO, RegtO. • A “P” may follow next to indicate that the directive is a manual-type order
instead of a letter-type order. • A directive classified as confidential will have a zero “0” preceding the
SSIC code. Directives classified, as secret will have a double zero “00” preceding the SSIC code. For example, MCOP0 or MCOP00.
• Every order is assigned a four- or five-digit SSIC code that identifies the
primary focus of the directive. • An “R” after the SSIC indicates that the directive is applicable only to the
Marine Corps Reserves. For example, MCO P1070R.2. • Consecutive point numbers are assigned to distinguish between orders
issued by the same echelon of command with the same SSIC. These numbers follow the SSIC code or the reserve designation.
Identification of Bulletins
The criteria for identifying bulletins is similar to those for orders. Listed below are identifying criteria for bulletins. • The originating echelon of command is abbreviate. • “Bul,” follows the abbreviated echelon of command to designate the
directive a bulletin. • A “0” or “00” preceding the SSIC indicates if the bulletin is classified. • The assigned SSIC code is determined by the subject matter. • An “R” designates as applicable to only the reserve. • Bulletins are not issued a consecutive point number, but are given an
issued date. For example, MCBul 01210R of 7 April 02.
Continued on next page
![Page 246: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/246.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-16 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1
Directives, Continued
Identification of Messages
Message directives are identified by serial numbers assigned throughout a calendar year by HQMC. The most common message directives are addressed to all Marines worldwide (ALMAR). For example ALMAR 20/02 would identify the 20th ALMAR message directive issued in 2002. Message directives are prepared in accordance with the Naval Tele-communications Publication. Directives issued by commands other than HQMC and HQMC issued directives other than ALMARs are identified by the issuing command Date-Time Group (DTG). For example, a DTG of a message directive issued by the First Marine Air Wing on 31 Mar 02 at 1200 would look like this, “FIRST MAW CAMP BUTLER JA, 311200Z MAR 02.
![Page 247: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/247.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-17 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Direction Complete items 1 through 8 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 What is a file?
a. A collection of folders and correspondence in a square metal casing b. A collection of all correspondence in the form of standard letters c. A collection of objects in a row d. A tool of hardened steel with cutting ridges for forming or smoothing
Item 2 Which type of folder is used to establish a correspondence file?
a. Manila b. Pocket c. Kraft d. Sectional
Item 3 What does the acronym SSIC mean?
a. Standard Subject Identification Codes b. Subject Source Identification Codes c. Simple Standard Identification Codes d. Standard Summary Identification Codes
Item 4 The purpose of SECNAVINST 5210.11D is to
a. identify files and directives used in the department of the Navy. b. ensure the accurate designation of files and directives within the
department of the Navy. c. standardize the Naval correspondence and file maintenance procedures. d. revise the department of the Navy SSICs and department of the Navy file
maintenance procedures.
Continued on next page
![Page 248: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/248.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-18 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 5 What is the general category for designator 2000-2999?
a. General Administration and Management b. Telecommunications c. Ordnance Material d. Operations and Readiness
Item 6 A directive is a formal written communication from the unit commander that
a. regulates administrative practices. b. informs the public. c. protects the property. d. designs structures and policy.
Item 7 The different types of directives are orders, bulletins, and
a. memorandums. b. letters. c. messages. d. endorsements.
Item 8 Which item is one of the identifying criteria for an order?
a. The letter “S” after the SSIC indicating a classification of “secret” b. An issued date c. A cancellation date d. The letter “R” indicates as applicable to the reserves only
Continued on next page
![Page 249: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/249.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-19 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Solutions The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 b 7-4 2 c 7-4 3 a 7-6 4 d 7-6 5 b 7-7 6 a 7-13 7 c 7-13 8 d 7-15
![Page 250: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/250.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 7-20 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
![Page 251: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/251.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-21
LESSON 2
CORRESPONDENCE
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
1 hour, 15 minutes
Scope This lesson is designed to familiarize the staff noncommissioned officer
(SNCO) with correspondence standards, procedures, and formats.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to • Identify the definition of correspondence.
• Identify the purpose of SECNAVINST 5216.5D.
• Identify the guidelines for writing correspondence.
• Identify the types of correspondence formats.
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.
Topic See Page Introduction 7-21 Naval Correspondence 7-22 Paragraphs 7-23 Standard Letters 7-26 Multiple Address Letters 7-34 Endorsements 7-38 Memorandums 7-41 Point Papers 7-45 Business Letters 7-47 Lesson 2 Exercise 7-51
![Page 252: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/252.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-22
Naval Correspondence
Overview The Navy Department uses various types of correspondence for an array of
administrative and operational tasks. The SNCO will experience an increased administrative responsibility over a broad spectrum of operational and organizational tasks.
Definition Correspondence refers to the types of communications used to transmit
written ideas and messages. The types of correspondence include letters, postcards, memoranda, notes, telecommunications, and any other form of addressed, written communications sent or received. Naval correspondence is the term often used by Navy and Marine Corps personnel to describe correspondence used within the respective organizations.
SECNAVINST 5216.5D
Secretary of the Navy Instruction 5216.5D is the Navy Correspondence manual. It prescribes uniform standards for the management and preparation of correspondence.
Writing Guidelines
The tone, quality, and responsiveness of correspondence is important. The command’s image and effectiveness is impaired if written correspondence is sloppy, difficult to understand, unresponsive, cold, impersonal, or incomplete. Correspondence should incorporate • Neat appearance • Correct format • Organized and rational flow of information to adequately support or
discuss a topic, view, or proposal • Concise and easy to understand language • Error free writing • Grammatically correct writing • Neutral gender without detracting from the intent of the document • Other means of communication when necessary • A point of contact and return phone number when a reply may be
necessary • Automated office equipment to increase efficiency; i.e. facsimile machine
and other electronic advances
![Page 253: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/253.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-23
Paragraphs
Introduction Writing professional correspondence and developing presentations requires
the author to write, meeting the organizational expectation. The Marine Corps generally uses brief and concise statements to communicate information. Paragraph content and format are the essential building blocks used to develop documents for professional correspondence.
Content Content is the information contained within a paragraph. It should be
organized in a logical manner that allows the paragraph to project a concept, point of view, or idea.
Parts of a Paragraph
A paragraph has three parts: • Topic sentence • Supporting details • Closing sentence
Topic Sentence The topic sentence is the first sentence in a paragraph. It introduces the main
idea of the paragraph.
Supporting Details
Supporting details come after the topic sentence. They give details to develop and support the main idea of the paragraph.
Closing Sentence
The closing sentence is the last sentence in a paragraph. It restates the main idea of the paragraph using different words.
Format Standard paragraph formatting is used to keep the document organized and
neat, and increases understanding.
Identifying Paragraphs and Subparagraphs
Main paragraphs are numbered in sequence 1, 2 ,3, etc. Subparagraphs are identified in the following sequence: a., (1), (a), (1), (a). Indent each new subparagraph by four spaces and start typing on the fifth space. Single space within main paragraphs and subparagraphs and double space between them.
Continued on next page
![Page 254: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/254.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-24
Paragraphs, Continued
Limits Subparagraphs
Subparagraphs clearly display levels of importance and encourage the use of lists for easy reading. They clutter writing when carried too far. Subparagraphs should not divide past the second level, (a), until all reparagraphing alternatives have been used first. As illustrated in the paragraph formatting diagram on page 7-25.
Headings Use brief but informative paragraph headings in long correspondence with
widely varying topics. Underline any heading and capitalize its key words. Be consistent across main paragraphs and subparagraphs; if paragraph 1 has a heading, paragraph 2 would need a heading; if 1a has a heading, 1b would need a heading.
Citing When referencing a paragraph or subparagraph, write the numbers and letters
without period or spaces, for example 2b(4)(a).
Continued on next page
![Page 255: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/255.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-25
Paragraphs, Continued
Paragraph Formatting
The illustration below is an example of paragraph and subparagraph formatting.
1.**Numbering for main paragraph. % 2. If subparagraphs are needed, use at least two; e.g., a (1) must have a (2). % ****a. Indent each new subdivision four spaces and start typing at the fifth space.
% ****b.**Text. % *********(1)*Documents rarely require subdividing to the extent shown below. % *********(2)*Text. % *************(a)*Do not subparagraph past this level until you have exhausted all reparagraphing. % *************(b)*Text. %
*****************1.**Text. % *********************a.**Text. % *************************(1)*Text. % ***************************** (a)*Never subparagraph beyond this level. % ***************************** (b)*Text. % *************************(2)*Text. % *********************b.**Text. % *****************2.**Text. % 10.**When using two digits, continue to indent each new subdivision four spaces and start typing on the fifth space (paragraphs will not line up). % **** a.**Text. % ********* (9)*Text. % ********* (10)*Text.
% *************** (a) Text. % *************** (b) Text. % ********* (11)*Text. % **** b.**Text. % 11 NOTE: * An asterisk (*) indicates a single blank space.
% A percent sign (%) indicates a single blank line.
![Page 256: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/256.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-26
Standard Letters
General The format of the standard letter, with slight variations, sets the pattern for
joint letters, multiple address letters, endorsements, directives, and memoranda. The standard letter is used to correspond officially with addressees within the Department of Defense (DoD). It may be used when writing to addressees outside DoD only if they have adopted this format.
Standard Letter Format Guidelines
When drafting a standard letter, the author should pay attention to the following format guidelines, which correspond to the format on the preceding page. While the naval correspondence was written for use with a typewriter, the author will have to adjust the formats for use with a personal computer (PC). The table below explains the guidelines to use for each item in a standard letter. The numbers on each item correspond to the diagram on page 7-29.
Item Guideline
(1) Margins
Margins are set at 1 inch from the top, bottom, and sides of each page. The exceptions to this are on letterhead paper, typing starts more than 1 inch from the top when the letterhead is printed and less if it is typed. Typing may end more than 1 inch from the bottom that has a signature. Computer applications require the top margin to be set at ½ inch. Do not right justify margins or use proportional spacing.
(2)
Letterhead
Whether typing or stamping a letterhead, begin with “UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS,” centered on the fourth line from the top of the page. Center the activity’s name, address, and nine-digit zip code on succeeding lines.
(3) Identification
Symbols
If “in reply refer to,” is printed on the activity’s letterhead paper, type the SSIC on the next line. If “in reply refer to,” is not printed, type the SSIC on the second line below the letterhead, starting 2 inches or more from the right edge of the paper. There are three parts of the identification symbols: • Standard Subject Identification Code (SSIC) • Originator’s code (with or without serial numbers) • Date (typed in day-month-year order without
punctuation)
Continued on next page
![Page 257: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/257.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-27
Standard Letters, Continued
Standard Letter Format Guidelines, continued
Item Guideline
(4)
“From:” Line
The “From:” line identifies the originator’s title, name and location of the command (without the state or zip code). Type “From:”, at the left margin on the second line below the date line. Two spaces follow the colon, and continuation lines start under the first word after the heading. A comma separates the title of the originator from the title of the command.
(5) “To:” and
“Via:” Lines
The “To:” line identifies the recipients of the document. Type “To:” at the left margin on the first line under the “From:” line (don’t skip a line). Four spaces follow the colon, and continuation lines start under the first word after the heading. The “Via:” line is used when one or more commands outside your own should see a letter before it reaches the action addressee. Type the “Via:” at the left margin on the first line below the “To:” line. Three spaces follow the colon, and continuation lines start under the first word after the heading. Number “Via:” addresses if you list two or more.
(6) Subject Line
The subject line consists of a sentence fragment that tells readers what the letter is about (no more than 10 words). Phrase the subject to make it genuinely informative and capitalize every letter after the colon. Type “Subj:” at the left margin on the second line under the last line of the previous heading. Two spaces follow the colon.
(7) Reference
Line
The reference line identifies any resources the document cites or uses in the content. Type “Ref:” at the left margin on the second line below the subject line. Use a lowercase letter (beginning with the letter a) in parentheses before the description of every reference. Three spaces follow the colon, and one space follows the closing parentheses. Continuation lines start under the first word after the heading.
Continued on next page
![Page 258: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/258.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-28
Standard Letters, Continued
Standard Letter Format Guidelines, continued
Item Guideline
(8)
Enclosure Line
Enclosures are listed in the order they appear in the text. Type “Encl:”, at the left margin on the second line below the last line of the previous heading. Use a number in parentheses (beginning with the number 1) before the description of every enclosure. Two spaces follow the colon, and one space follows the closing parenthesis. Continuation lines start under the first word after the heading.
(9) Text
Skip a line before starting the text. Paragraphs should be formatted as described in the Paragraph and Subparagraph Formatting section of this lesson.
(10) Margin
The right, left, and bottom margins should be one (1) inch.
Continued on next page
![Page 259: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/259.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-29
Standard Letters, Continued
Standard Letter
The illustration below is an example of the standard letter format.
Continued on next page
1 % 2 % 3 % 4 UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS NAME OF ACTIVITY
ADDRESS LOCATION, STATE 12345-1234
1 % 2 SSIC Code/Serial Date 1 % 2 From:**Title of activity head, name of activity, location when needed To: ****Title of activity, name of activity, location when needed (Code) Via: ****(1) Title of activity head location when needed (Code) ********(2) Pattern of line (1) repeated for next endorser 1 % 2 Subj:** NORMAL WORD ORDER WITH ALL LETTERS CAPITALIZED 1 % 2 Ref: ***(a)*Communication or Document that gears directly on the subject at hand 1 % 2 Encl: ** (1)*Title of material enclosed with letter (2)*Title of material separately (sep. cover) 1 % 2 1. This example shows the first page of a two page standard letter. We have used
many of the elements that might appear on a standard letter. Mention reference (a) and enclosures (1) and (2) in the text.
1 % 2 2.**Start the “From:” line on the second line below the date line. The date may be
typed or stamped in date, month, and last two year digit format. % 3.**Arrange paragraphs as shown in Drafting Correspondence section. 1 % 2 ****a.**Do not start a paragraph at the bottom of a page unless you can carry at least
two lines over to another page. % ****b.**Do not number the first page; number only second and later pages. % ****c.**Other full-page examples in this chapter and later ones shoe the spacing to
correspondence that variously omits “Via:,” “Ref:,” and “Encl:” lines.
10
1
2
8
5
7
]
6
] 3
]
]4
1” Margin
NOTE: * An asterisk (*) indicates a single blank space. A percent sign (%) indicates a single blank line.
9
1” Margin
1” Margin Minimum
10 10
![Page 260: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/260.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-30
Standard Letters, Continued
Second and Later Pages
Second pages are typed in the following format: • Start typing at the left margin on the sixth line from the top of the page. • Repeat the subject line as it appears on the first page. Type text on the second line below the subject. • Standard letters do not use complementary closes, for example, Sincerely,
or With Regards). • The signature block starts at the center of the page on the fourth line below the text. • The “Copy to” block lists the addresses outside your command that need to know a letter’s content but don’t need to act on it. Type, “Copy to,” at the left margin on the second line below the signature block. • The “Blind Copy to:” block is used to show internal distribution. This is printed on internal copies, never on the original document. Type “Blind Copy to:” at the left margin on the second line below the previous block. • The drafter’s identification is typed on the first or last page of the file copy. • This includes the name of the writer, writer’s office code, writer’s phone extension or room number, typist’s identification, date of typing, and word processing symbols. • Page numbers are centered ½ inch from the bottom of the page starting with the number 2. Single page letters and the first page of multiple-page letters are not numbered. An example of the format for second pages is on the next page.
Continued on next page
![Page 261: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/261.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-31
Standard Letters, Continued
Standard Letter Page 2
The illustration below is an example of a standard letter page 2 format.
Continued on next page
1 % 2 % 3 % 4 % 5 % 6 SUBJECT BLOCK 1 % 2 ****d.**Second and succeeding pages of a standard letter look like this: 1 % 2 ********(1)*Start typing on the sixth line. Repeat the subject line. 1 2 ********(2) Start the text on the second line below the date or subject line. % % 4.**”Copy to:” addresses appear on all copies. “Blind copy to:” addresses as well as the identity of the writer and typist appear on internal copies only. % 5.**A standard letter uses no complimentary close. 1 % 2 % 3 % 4 NAME OF SIGNER By Direction % 1 % 2 Copy to: SNDL number and/or short title of information addressee SNDL number and/or short title of information addressee 1 % 2 Blind Copy to: List blind copy addresses 1 % 2 Writer: Name, organization, room # or telephone # Typist: Name, date, word processing symbols
]
]
]
]
1” Margin 1” Margin
½” from bottom and centered
]
1” Margin Minimum
![Page 262: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/262.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-32
Standard Letters, Continued
Standard Letter With Classification Markings
The illustration below is an example of a standard letter with classification markings.
Continued on next page
![Page 263: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/263.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-33
Standard Letters, Continued
Second Page of Standard Letter With Classification Markings
The illustration below is an example of the second page of a standard letter with classification markings.
Continued on next page
![Page 264: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/264.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-34
Multiple Address Letters
. General Multiple address letters are used when you have more than one addressee.
The multiple address letter has the same format as the standard letter, except in handling addressees. There are three ways to list addresses: • “To:” line only • “Distribution:’ block only • Both the “To:” line and “Distribution:” block
“To:” Line Use the “To:” line only if you have four addresses or less.
“Distribution” Block
Use the “Distribution:” block when you have more than four addressees.
“To:” Line and “Distribution:” Block
Use both the “To:” line and “Distribution:” block in the same letter when you show a group title whose distribution is unknown
Continued on next page
![Page 265: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/265.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-35
Multiple Address Letters, Continued
Multiple-Address Letter Using “To:” Line
The illustration below is an example of a multiple address letter using the “To:".
Continued on next page
![Page 266: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/266.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-36
Multiple Address Letters, Continued
Multiple-Address Letter Using a “Distribution:” Block
The illustration below is an example of a multiple address letter using a “Distribution:” block.
Continued on next page
![Page 267: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/267.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-37
Multiple Address Letters, Continued
Multiple-Address Letters Using a “To:” Line and a “Distribution:” Block
The illustration below is an example of a multiple-address letter using a “To:” line and a “Distribution:” block.
Continued on next page
![Page 268: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/268.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-38
Endorsements
General When a letter is transmitted “Via:” your command, use an endorsement to
forward comments, recommendations, or information. Start the endorsement number line at the left margin on the second line below the date line. If the correspondence is classified, start on the second line below the line carrying this designation.
Endorsements There are two types of endorsements:
• Same-page • New-page The length of the endorsement and the amount of space available determines which type is used.
Number Sequence
Each endorsement is numbered in the sequence in which it is added to the basic letter. Indicate the numbers of the endorsement by using ordinal numbers such as FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, followed by typing “Endorsement on” and identify the basic letter using the same style as a reference line.
Continued on next page
![Page 269: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/269.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-39
Endorsements, Continued
Same Page Endorsement
The illustration below is an example of a same-page endorsement.
Continued on next page
![Page 270: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/270.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-40
Endorsements, Continued
New-Page Endorsement
The illustration is an example of a new-page endorsement.
Continued on next page
![Page 271: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/271.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-41
Memorandums
Definition Memorandums are used as informal ways to correspond within a command or
between Department of the Navy activities. Subordinate commands may use it to correspond directly with each other on routine official business.
Formats There are seven memorandum formats to choose from that suit different
subjects, occasions, and audiences. • Memorandum For the Record (MFR) • “From-To” Memorandum • Plain-paper Memorandum • Letterhead Memorandum • “Memorandum For” Memorandum • Memorandum of Agreement • Memorandum of Understanding
Memorandum For The Record
The MFR is as internal document used to record supporting information in the record that is not recorded elsewhere.
“From-To” Memorandum
The “from-to” memorandum may be directed to one or more addressees. If very informal, it may be handwritten.
Plain-Paper Memorandum
Plain-paper memorandums are used for informal communications within a command. It is no more formal than the memorandum form, but it is more flexible when there are multiple addressees, via addressees or both.
Letterhead Memorandum
Letterhead memoranda are used when direct liaison with individuals outside of your command is authorized, the letterhead memorandum may be used to correspond on routine matters that neither make a commitment nor take an official stand.
“Memorandum For” Memorandum
The “memorandum for” is the most formal memorandum. It is used for communications between high level officials such as the Secretary of Defense, the Secretary of the Navy, and Assistant Secretaries. It is prepared on letterhead stationary and follows standard letter practice.
Continued on next page
![Page 272: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/272.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-42
Memorandums, Continued
Memorandum of Agreement or Understanding
The memorandum of agreements may be used to document mutual agreements of facts, intentions, procedures, limits on future actions, and areas of present or future coordination, or commitments.
Examples The following illustrations are some examples of the different memorandum
formats. The illustration below is an example of a memorandum for the record.
Continued on next page
![Page 273: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/273.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-43
Memorandums, Continued
Plain-Paper “From-To” Memorandum
The illustration below is an example of a plain-paper memorandum.
Continued on next page
![Page 274: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/274.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-44
Memorandums, Continued
Letterhead Memorandum
The illustration below is an example of a letterhead memorandum.
Continued on next page
![Page 275: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/275.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-45
Point Papers
Point (Talking) Papers
Point papers are referred to as “talking papers.” They provide a standalone document that presents the essential elements of a subject. It serves as a readily available source of condensed, factual information on topical subjects.
Format The point paper’s format is very specific to provide uniformity throughout the
Navy Department. The paper is confined to a single 8 ½ by 11-inch page. Allow 1-inch margins for the top, bottom and sides. If unable to get the entire text on one page, margins may be adjusted to accommodate the entire text on one page. Eliminate unnecessary words like “the” and “that.”
Section Headers And Paragraphs
The section headers and paragraphs will be written in the following format: • The paper will have a title of point paper. • Each section will begin with a header for example: Background,
Discussion, Recommendation. • Headers are centered on the page and typed in all capital letters. • Double space between paragraphs and bullets. • Put main points first with supporting information following. Use short
phrases and bullets. • Indent subordinate points in cascading style. • Continuation lines start directly under the first word of the paragraph. • Data should be presented in graphics rather than words when possible. • Abbreviations and acronyms may be used if spelled out on initial use. • Technical terms, phrases, and code names should be explained in plain
language. • Classification markings must be included on the page except when paper
is unclassified.
Continued on next page
![Page 276: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/276.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-46
Point Papers, Continued
Point (Talking) Paper Example
The illustration below is an example of a point (talking) paper.
Continued on next page
![Page 277: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/277.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-47
Business Letters
Description Business letters are used to correspond with agencies, businesses, or
individuals outside the Department of Defense (DoD), who are not familiar with the standard letter. It may also be used for official correspondence between individuals within DoD, when the occasion calls for a personal approach.
Margins Adjust margins from 1 to 2 inches to achieve maximum balance; never use
less than a 1-inch margin.
Parts of a Business Letter
A business letter is formatted differently than in the standard letter. Listed below are the parts of a business letter. The numbers on each item correspond to the diagram on page 7-49.
Part Description
(1)
Identification Symbols
The following three symbols are written in the upper right corner of the letter: • SSIC • Originator’s code • Date (written in month-day-year order)
(2) Inside Address
Placed 2 to 8 lines below the date, blocked and flush with the left margin.
(3) Attention Line
An optional line used to direct the letter to a business in general and to bring it to the attention of a particular person or department. Start typing two lines below the inside address, block and flush with the left margin, and two lines above the salutation line.
(4) Salutation Line
Capitalize the first letter of the first word of the salutation as well as the first letter of the addressee’s courtesy title and surname such as, Dear Mr.
Continued on next page
![Page 278: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/278.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-48
Business Letters, Continued
Parts of a Business Letter, continued
Part Description
(5)
Subject Line
Use of the subject line is optional and may replace the salutation. The subject line should be very brief and to the point with more than one line in length. Capitalize all letters of the subject line.
(6) Body of the Letter
(7) Margin
Single-space within paragraphs and double-space between paragraphs. Indent main paragraphs four spaces and start typing on the fifth space. Do not number main paragraphs. The first lines of subparagraphs should be indented, lettered, or numbered in standard letter fashion. The right, left, and bottom margins should be one (1) inch.
(8)
Complimentary Close
Use “sincerely” followed by a comma for the complimentary close of a business letter. Start the complimentary close at the center of the page on the second line below the text.
(9) Signature Block
Start all lines of the “signature” block at the center of the page, beginning on the fourth line below “sincerely.”
(10)
Enclosure
Type “enclosure:” on the second line below the “signature” block, number and describe them briefly. Note: References and enclosures are addressed in the body of the letter.
(11) Separate Mailing
When an enclosure is to be sent separately, type “Separate Mailing:” and a brief description.
(12) Copy To Line
Type “Copy To:” at the left margin on the second line below the enclosure line if any, or the signature block.
Identifying Second and Succeeding Pages
Repeat the identification symbols, from the first page, on the sixth line from the top at the right margin. Continue the text beginning on the second line below the identification symbols.
Numbering Pages
Single-page letters or the first page of a multiple-page letter are not numbered. Center page numbers ½ inch from the bottom of the page, starting with the number 2. No punctuation accompanies a page number.
Continued on next page
![Page 279: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/279.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-49
Business Letters, Continued
Two Page Business Letter (1st Page)
The illustration below is an example of the first page of a business letter.
Continued on next page
![Page 280: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/280.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 7-50
Business Letters, Continued
Two Page Business Letter (2nd Page)
The illustration below is an example of the second page of a business letter.
![Page 281: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/281.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 Exercise 7-51
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Direction Complete items 1 through 10 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson
Item 1 What is the definition of correspondence?
a. The types of communications used to transmit written ideas and messages b. Any type of communication used to transmit an idea or message c. The types of communications used to transmit verbal ideas and messages d. Any idea or message used for communication
Item 2 The purpose of SECNAVINST 5216.5D is to
a. establish policy and procedures for submitting correspondence. b. prescribe uniform standards for the management and preparations
correspondence. c. prescribe dates and timelines for transmitting correspondence. d. prescribe the amount of correspondence allowed within a command.
Item 3 Which is a guideline for writing correspondence?
a. Specific gender identification b. Block paragraphs with left justification c. Optional point of contact and return phone number d. Correct format
Item 4 Which item is a part of a paragraph?
a. Salutation b. Supporting details c. Introduction d. Verbal bridge
Continued on next page
![Page 282: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/282.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 Exercise 7-52
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 5 Which item is part of the identification symbols in a standard letter?
a. Originator’s code b. Reporting Unit code c. Individual Activity code d. Local Area code
Item 6 Which item is one of the three ways to list addressees on a multiple address
letter? a. “Greetings” line b. “Salutations” line c. “Distribution” block d. “Enclosure” block
Item 7 Which item is one of the types of endorsements?
a. Double-page b. Second-page c. Half-page d. New-page
Item 8 Which item is one of the memorandum formats?
a. “Memorandum For” memorandum b. “Memorandum To The Files” memorandum c. “Memorandum of Misunderstanding” memorandum d. “Memorandum For All” memorandum
Item 9 How are headers placed and typed in a point paper?
a. Aligned to the left of the page and typed in capital and lower case letters b. Centered on the page and typed in all capital letters c. Indented five spaces on the page and typed in all lower case letters d. Centered on the page and typed in capital and lower case letters
Continued on next page
![Page 283: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/283.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 Exercise 7-53
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 10 The purpose of a business letter is to
a. correspond with other federal government agencies. b. correspond with government agencies outside the Marine Corps. c. correspond with Marine Corps subordinate commands. d. correspond with agencies and businesses outside DoD.
Continued on next page
![Page 284: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/284.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 Exercise 7-54
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 a 7-22 2 b 7-22 3 d 7-22 4 b 7-23 5 a 7-26 6 c 7-34 7 d 7-38 8 a 7-41 9 b 7-45
10 d 7-47
![Page 285: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/285.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 7-55
LESSON 3
PUBLICATIONS
Introduction
Estimated Study Time
45 minutes
Scope This lesson will familiarize the staff noncommissioned officer (SNCO) with
the procedures for distribution, maintenance, and the status of doctrinal publications within the Marine Corps Doctrinal publications program to include service, multi-service, joint, multinational, and associated publications.
Learning Objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to • Identify the types of publications.
• Identify where to obtain electronic copies of publications.
• Identify how to requisition publications.
• Identify how to maintain publications.
• Identify the Marine Corps Publication and Distribution System (MCPDs).
• Identify the functions of the Directives Control Point (DCP).
Continued on next page
![Page 286: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/286.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 7-56
Introduction, Continued
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.
Topic See Page Introduction 7-55 Types of Publications 7-57 Electronic Distribution of Publications 7-61 Requisition 7-62 Maintenance 7-63 Directives Control Point (DCP) 7-64 Lesson 3 Exercise 7-66
![Page 287: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/287.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 7-57
Types of Publications
General The Marine Corps publication hierarchy is comprised of Marine Corps
Service doctrinal publications, dual-designated publications, and multi-service designated publications.
Marine Corps Service Doctrine
Marine Corps Service doctrine consists of publications created to describe the warfighting doctrine, tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) of the Marine Corps. The Fleet Marine Force Manuals (FMFM), Fleet Marine Force Reference Publications (FMRP), and Operational Handbooks (OH) are being phased out as doctrinal publications. These publications are being revised, rewritten, and designated as one of the following: • Marine Corps Doctrinal Publications (MCDP) • Marine Corps Warfighting Publications (MCWP) • Marine Corps Reference Publications (MCRP)
MCDP MCDPs are higher order doctrine publications containing the fundamental
and enduring beliefs of warfighting (capstone) and the guiding doctrine for the conduct of major warfighting activities (keystone). MCDPs supersede selected FMFMs. The table below lists the currently published MCDPs.
Marine Corps Doctrinal Publications
Capstone Publications Keystone Publications MCDP 1 Warfighting MCDP 1-0 Marine Corps
Operations MCDP 1-1 Strategy MCDP 1-0.1 Componency MCDP 1-2 Campaigning MCDP 2 Intelligence MCDP 1-3 Tactics MCDP 3 Expeditionary
Operations MCDP 4 Logistics MCDP 5 Planning MCDP 6 Command and
Control
Continued on next page
![Page 288: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/288.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 7-58
Types of Publications, Continued
MCWP MCWPs have a narrower focus detailing TTP used in the prosecution of war
and other assigned tasks. MCWPs supersede FMFMs, FMFRPs, and OHs. The table below lists some examples of MCWPs.
Marine Corps Warfighting Publication
MCWP 2-1 Intelligence Operations MCWP 3-0 Training Series MCWP 3-1 Ground Combat Operations (FMFM 6) MCWP 3-2 Aviation Operations (FMFM 5-1) MCWP 3-3 Type Operations Series MCWP 3-4 MAGTF Operations Series MCWP 4-1 Logistics Operations (FMFM 4-1) MCWP 5-1 Marine Corps Planning Process MCWP 6-1 Command Series
MCRP MCRPs contain general reference and historical material and more specific
and detailed TTP than MCWPs. MCRPs are given the same number as the parent MCWP with an alpha designator added to the number. MCRPs supersede FMFRPs and OHs. The table below list some examples of MCRPs.
Marine Corps Reference Publications
MCRP 2-15.3B Reconnaissance Reports Guide MCRP 3-0A Unit Training Management Guide MCRP 3-11.1A Commander’s Tactical Handbook MCRP 4-11C Combat Cargo Operations Handbook MCRP 5-1A Doctrine References For Expeditionary Maneuver
Warfare MCRP 6-11B Discussion Guide For Marine Corps Values
Dual-Designated And Multi-Service Publications
Each military service is authorized to use other service’s doctrinal publications and to effect necessary modifications to align each with their own mission, roles, and functions. These publications identified as dual-designated or multi-service publications, contain TTP that two or more services use. Every publication must be approved by and bear the designation of each participating military service. Publications approved by the Marine Corps are designated as MCWPs or MCRPs.
Continued on next page
![Page 289: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/289.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 7-59
Types of Publications, Continued
Air, Land, Sea Application (ALSA) Publications
The ALSA center is chartered by the four service’s doctrine commands and tasked to rapidly develop publications that fill interoperability voids between services, joint forces, and staffs. These publications take on the form of multi-service TTP (MTTP) and address operational details often not included in our joint publications. Upon approval, ALSA publication are given an MCWP or MCRP designator and placed into the Marine Corps’ publication hierarchy.
Naval Doctrine Publications
These publications provide the fundamental concepts that govern the employment of Naval forces at all levels. They form the seamless fusion of Navy and Marine Corps doctrine, and form the naval characteristic of joint operations.
Joint Publications
These publications are developed by the Joint Chiefs of Staff and are promulgated as a distinct family of publications. Joint publications (JP) and Joint TTPs (JTTP) provide guidelines for the coordinated employment of forces from two or more military departments conducting joint operations. Listed in the table below are some examples of joint publications and joint TTP:
Joint Publications/Joint TTPs
JP 3-02 Joint Doctrine for Amphibious Operations JP 3-02.1 Joint Doctrine for Landing Force Operations JP 3-07.5 JTTP for Noncombatant Evacuation Operations (NEO) JP 3-09.3 JTTP for Close Air Support (CAS) JP 4-02.1 Public Affairs in Joint Operations JP 4-06 JTTP for Shipboard Helicopter Operations
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manuals (JMEM)
JMEMs provide in-depth descriptions of specific weapon system characteristics and effectiveness. JMEMs are reference documents detailing friendly weapon system capabilities and limitations, and are primarily used for weaponeering. JMEMs are designated as MCRPs but are not posted in the doctrine hierarchy.
Continued on next page
![Page 290: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/290.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 7-60
Types of Publications, Continued
Technical Publications
Official documents used by the Marine Corps that support material and equipment are called Technical publications.
Approved Allied Publications
Approved allied publications contain doctrine and TTP that the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) member nations have subscribed. When approved by the United States, these publications are the senior doctrinal guide for forces conducting NATO operations.
“Other” Service Publications
The Army, Navy, and Air Force have produced a large number of publications detailing TTPs for the many aspects of warfighting. Though not Marine Corps doctrine, these publications provide a wealth of information, and can be referenced to supplement Marine Corps TTP.
![Page 291: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/291.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 7-61
Electronic Distribution Of Publications
Purpose To provide information on the electronic distribution of doctrinal
publications. The Doctrine Division has developed an internet website to supplement and enhance the Marine Corps Publications Distribution System (MCPDS). The website provides electronic copies of current and draft doctrinal publications. Paper copies of doctrinal publications will still be available for ordering and distribution.
USMC Internet Website
The Marine Corps has developed an official website that lists unclassified publications, orders, directives, and technical publications. You can access this website at (http://www.usmc.mil) This website is open to internet users, however the technical publication site is restricted to military personnel only.
Doctrine Division Internet Website
The Doctrine Division has developed a NIPRNET (Non-secure Internet Protocol Routed Network) and SIPRNET (Secure Internet Protocol Routed Network) for hosting both unclassified and classified doctrinal publications. They are: • (https://www.doctrine.usmc.mil) NIPRNET unclassified publications • (http://www.doctrine.mccdc.usmc.smil.mil) SIPRNET classified
publications
Other Websites Listed below are some joint and other service websites that can be used to
access publications: • Joint Publication (http://www.dtic.mil/doctrine) • Multi-Service Publications (http://www.dtic.mil/alsa) • Air Force Publications (http://www.doctrine.af.mil/atdls/htm) • Army Publications (http://www.adtdl.army.mil) • Navy Publications (http://www.nwdc.navy.smil.mil)
![Page 292: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/292.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 7-62
Requisitioning
Introduction Doctrinal publications facilitate mission accomplishment; therefore,
commanders must take a personal interest in publications ordering and maintenance. All Marine Corps units shall maintain doctrinal publications appropriate to the mission of the organization.
Marine Corps Publication Distribution System
The Marine Corps Publication Distribution System (MCPDS) is an on-line interactive system that facilitates continuing distribution of changes and revisions for basic publications held by a command or activity that has been assigned as Individual Activity Code (IAC). It also provides the capability to order publications if stocked at Marine Corps Logistics Base (MCLB), Albany GA, display PCN information, create backorders, and maintain internal distribution locations.
Publication Listing (PL)
The publication listing is an electronic display in the Marine Corps Publication Distribution System (MCPDS). MCPDS lists every publication that is to be distributed to a unit automatically. Traditionally MCPDS users reside in the Adjutant, S-1, or administrative section of a unit.
Establishing Publication Requirements
Every unit that receives publications has an Individual Activity Code (IAC) assigned. Commanders must determine the publications requirements for their individual units since every unit is unique. This determination is derived for a variety factors such as • Mission • Geographic location • Experience of the members of the unit Publication requirements should be realistic and based on mission-essential criteria.
![Page 293: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/293.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 7-63
Maintenance
Maintaining a PL
Supervision is the most important action taken in maintaining and revising a PL and ordering publications. PL managers should aggressively review and follow-up on the status of all publication requests, as well as closely tracking unit requirements for additional or replacement publications.
Requisitioning Publications
Most Marine Corps publications are stocked at the Marine Corps Logistics Base (MCLB), Albany GA, and can be ordered electronically by publication control number (PCN) through MCPDS.
Requesting Non-stocked Publications
Publications not stocked in MCPDS will be ordered by submitting a written request in standard naval format to the Commandant of the Marine Corps CMC (ARD) Administration and Resources Management Division and include the following information:
• Complete identification of the publication • Title • Stock number (if known) • The source document (in which identified) • Equipment item designator number (if applicable) • Source of supply (if known) • Justification for publication • Point of contact • Telephone/FAX number and E-mail address • Individual Activity Code (IAC) • State if requisition is a one-time issue or continuing distribution
Classified Marine Corps Publications
Marine Corps activities with a requirement for classified Marine Corps publications will requisition by PCN through MCPDS. Services outside the Marine Corps will submit a written request to CMC (ARDE) Publishing and Logistics Systems Management Section in standard Naval format to include:
• Statement attesting that classified storage capabilities exist • Publication short title and subject (if known) • Number of copies required • Justification • Point of contact (including name and telephone number) • Complete military mailing address
![Page 294: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/294.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 7-64
Directives Control Point (DCP)
Purpose The directives control point evaluates the system’s operations within the
individual organization on a continuing basis, and analyzes directives, making recommendations for improvement when appropriate.
Function The DCP functions under the guidelines set forth in MCO P5215.1 Marine
Corps Publications. Under consolidated administration, it publishes all required publications at the organizational level. Subordinate units will not maintain a separate DCP. The following functions fall under the responsibility of the DCP: • Controlling the issuance of command-issued publications • Coordinating the organization’s requirements for publications • Determining and effecting internal distribution of authorized inventories of
publications and their maintenance • Organizing and maintaining the DCP • Maintaining, storing, accounting for, and controlling the organization’s
classified material • Conducting daily operation of the CMCC (Classified Materials Control
Center)
Distribution of Authorized Publication Inventories
Distribution of authorized publications inventories is based strictly upon a “need to know.” Commanders, officers in charge, or department heads should strictly adhere to the “need to know” criterion. A “yes” answer to one or more of the following questions would indicate a “need to know”: • Is the publication applicable to the specific mission of the user? • Is the publication applicable to the user’s administrative functions? • Is the publication applicable to the unit’s organic equipment, or
maintenance functions? • Is the publication applicable to the user’s support functions designated, or
inherent to the user? • Is the dissemination of the publication for command information of
action? • If the publication is desired for reference purposes, how frequently will it
be used?
Continued on next page
![Page 295: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/295.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 7-65
Directives Control Point (DCP), Continued
Distribution Statements
To facilitate information security, dissemination of Marine Corps publications was formally restricted only by designating a publication either “controlled” or “non-controlled.” DoD 5200.1R states, “certain information that would be designated unclassified may require classification when combined or associated with other unclassified information.” Sponsors shall identify the degree of restriction of distribution for each of their non-technical and technical publications based on distribution statements. The table below lists the seven distribution statements:
Designator Distribution Statement
A Approved for public release, distribution unlimited B Authorized to U.S. Government agencies only C Authorized to U.S. Government agencies and their
contractors D Authorized to DoD and DoD contractors only E Authorized to DoD components only F Further dissemination only as directed by DoD or higher
authority X Authorized to U.S. Government agencies and private
individuals or enterprises eligible to obtain export-controlled technical data in accordance with OPNAVINST 5510.161
Command Correspondence File
The DCP will establish and maintain the command’s official correspondence file, per SECNAVINST 5210.11 and MCO 5210.11. Staff-sections may be authorized to hold copies of command correspondence that they originate and sign “by direction,” file the official file copy within the DCP.
![Page 296: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/296.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 Exercise 7-66
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1 Which publications contain general reference and historical material?
a. MCDP b. MCWP c. MTTP d. MCRP
Item 2 Which internet website lists unclassified publications, orders, directives and
technical publications? a. www.doctrine.usmc.mil b. www.dtic.mil/doctrine c. www.usmc.mil d. www.mbw.usmc.mil
Item 3 What is a capability of the Marine Corps Publication Distribution System?
a. Assign individual activity codes b. Maintain internal distribution locations c. Create publication control numbers d. Inventory stock at the Marine Corps Logistics Base Albany
Item 4 Which is one of the factors for determining publication requirements?
a. Experience of the members of the unit b. Type of organic equipment possessed by the unit c. Size of the unit d. Command structure
Continued on next page
![Page 297: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/297.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 Exercise 7-67
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 5 Which is a function of the directives control point?
a. Ensure compliance to all orders and directives b. Establish section directives control points c. Control the issuance of command-issued publications d. Establish individual activity codes
Item 6 Distribution Statement “C” authorizes dissemination of Marine Corps
publications to ___________________. a. DoD components only b. U.S. Government agencies and their contractors c. DoD and DoD contractors only d. U.S. Government agencies only
Continued on next page
![Page 298: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/298.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 Exercise 7-68
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.
Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 d 7-58 2 c 7-61 3 b 7-62 4 a 7-62 5 c 7-64 6 b 7-65
![Page 299: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/299.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-1 Review Lesson Examination
LEADERSHIP AND ADMINISTRATION
REVIEW LESSON EXAMINATION
Review Lesson
Introduction The purpose of the review lesson examination is to prepare you for the final
examination. We recommend that you try to complete your review lesson examination without referring to the text, but for those items (questions) you are unsure of, restudy the text. When you finish your review lesson and are satisfied with your responses, check your responses against the answers provided at the end of this review lesson examination.
Directions Select the ONE answer that BEST completes the statement or that answers
the item. Each question will be in the form of multiple choice, so circle your response.
Item 1 Which of the following lists the four indicators of leadership?
a. Proficiency, morale, esprit de corps, discipline b. Dedicated, competent, responsible, knowledgeable c. Competent, discipline, esprit de corps, knowledgeable d. Proficiency, morale, leadership, decisiveness
Item 2 Esprit de corps is best described as
a. guidelines for leadership principles. b. a realistic approach to leadership. c. the projection of the leader’s personality. d. enthusiasm and loyalty to the unit.
Continued on next page
![Page 300: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/300.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-2 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Items 3 Through 7
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the definition from column 2 that best describes the leadership trait in column 1. The answers in column 2 may not be used more than once.
Column 1 Leadership Trait
Column 2 Definition
___ 3. Initiative ___ 4. Loyalty ___ 5. Bearing ___ 6. Judgment ___ 7. Unselfishness
a. Action in the absence of orders b. Faithfulness to country c. Favorable impressions d. Ability to reach sound decisions e. Avoiding to provide for your own
comfort at the expense of others
Item 8 Keeping your personnel informed is which leadership principle?
a. Caring for others b. Communication c. Developing subordinates d. Confirmation
Item 9 Knowing your Marines and looking out for their welfare is which leadership
principle? a. Caring for others b. Teamwork c. Knowing capabilities d. Self-improvement
Continued on next page
![Page 301: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/301.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-3 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 10 Leadership style can be defined as the leader’s _________ pattern as
_________ by the Marines who the leader is attempting to influence, guide, or direct. a. physical; determined b. behavioral; determined c. perception; acknowledged d. behavioral; perceived
Item 11 The leader defines limits and permits subordinates to make decisions can be
described as which leadership style? a. Democratic b. Delegating c. Telling d. Autocratic
Item 12 A military professional must have which three characteristics?
a. Competent, responsible, and dedicated b. Expertise, careerism, and hard charging c. Careerism, occupationalist, and enforcer d. Expertise, ethics, and thoughtful
Item 13 Readiness and the individual’s ability to perform in combat is affected
negatively by a. careerism and professionalism. b. professionalism and occupationalism. c. selfishness and individualism. d. careerism and occupationalism.
Continued on next page
![Page 302: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/302.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-4 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 14 Which documents contain Military Code of Ethics?
a. Civil Disorders, Combat Training, Conduct or Inquiry b. Profession of Arms, Philosophy of Leadership, Command Management c. UCMJ, Code of Conduct, Oath of Office d. DD214, FM 20-01, Military Leadership
Item 15 SNCOs have the responsibility for molding subordinates into Marines.
Which of the following is a method that SNCOs use to mold their subordinate Marines? a. Promise of promotion b. Clear instructions c. Displaying anger d. Showing favoritism
Item 16 SNCOs must conduct day-to-day operations in an environment that
a. encourages subordinates to seek advice and counsel. b. provides fair and impartial treatment. c. accepts subordinates’ suggestions for improved performance. d. all of the above.
Item 17 Which of the following describes the relationship between a SNCO and
senior officer? a. Supporting and trusting b. Selfish and withholding c. Informal and familiar d. Constructive and assuming
Continued on next page
![Page 303: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/303.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-5 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 18 Which reference contains guidelines and standards for assignment of conduct
and proficiency marks? a. MCO P1070.12 Individual Records Administration Manual (IRAM) b. MCO P1080.35 Personnel Reporting Instruction Manual (PRIM) c. MCO 1610.11 Performance Evaluations, Appeals Manual (PEAM) d. MCO P1400.29 Marine Corps Promotion Manual (MARCORPROMAN)
Item 19 Which of the following are occasions for submitting proficiency and conduct
marks? a. TAD 60 days or more and promotion b. Enlistment and discharge c. Completion of service school and discharge d. Company NJP and reduction
Item 20 What are the effective dates when assigning semiannual proficiency and
conduct marks for regular Marines? a. 1 January and 1 December b. 1 July and 1 December c. 1 October and 1 April d. 31 January and 31 July
Item 21 What is the regular and reserve code for transfer?
a. TR b. TRAN c. TF d. TD
Continued on next page
![Page 304: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/304.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-6 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Items 22 Through 25
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the filing instruction from column 2 that best matches the occasion in column 1. The answers in column 2 may not be used more than once.
Column 1
Occasion
Column 2
Filing Instruction
___ 22. If the effective date for transfer coincides with the requirement to report semiannual marks
___ 23. If the Marine attends annual training within 90 days of the effective date for reporting annual marks
___ 24. If the Marine receives a mark for any other occasion within 90 days of the effective date for reporting annual marks
___ 25. If the effective date for annual marks coincides with any reporting occasion other than promotion or transfer
a. Report annual marks of Not Applicable
b. Transfer marks take precedence c. Report annual marks d. Annual marks take precedence
Item 26 Which of the following qualities are considered when recommending
proficiency marks?
a. Physical fitness and leadership b. Timeliness and leadership c. Trustworthiness and participation d. Bearing and mission accomplishment
Item 27 Which of the following qualities are considered when recommending conduct
marks?
a. Cooperation and personal appearance b. Adaptability and know how c. Influence on others and interest d. Individual character and leadership
Continued on next page
![Page 305: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/305.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-7 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 28 Scenario: Lance Corporal White handles routine matters acceptably, but in
your opinion, he has not performed to the best of his abilities. Lance Corporal White gets the job done; however, both you and the squad leader have often found it necessary to supervise him closely when he is assigned a task, which is not routine. You have encouraged Lance Corporal White to take correspondence courses, but to date he has not enrolled himself. Several times during the past 5 months, you have been obliged to counsel him for leaving on liberty when his squad was not squared away. Lance Corporal White has received one valid letter of indebtedness from a local merchant during this marking period. He keeps himself in good physical condition. Of your three squad leaders, Lance Corporal White is the least effective. Considering this information, which corresponding adjective ratings for proficiency and conduct marks are appropriate? a. Unsatisfactory and unsatisfactory b. Below average and below average c. Below average and average d. Average and unsatisfactory
Continued on next page
![Page 306: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/306.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-8 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 29 Scenario: Corporal Black is a real take-charge individual. He readily
assumes responsibility and uses his authority wisely. He requires only a general outline of what is to be accomplished, then goes out, and completes the assigned task in an expeditious, efficient manner. You have relied heavily on Corporal Black’s ability to instruct in general military subjects. Since making corporal, he has taken two MCI courses, The Marine NCO and The Marine Rifle Platoon. Corporal Black completed both of these courses with high final grades. His squad usually represents the best appearance and is the best in the field at inspections and in drill. The members in his squad never create disciplinary problems. Corporal Black keeps himself at the peak of physical condition and ensures that his squad does likewise. His personal appearance and habits are above reproach. Considering this information, which corresponding adjective ratings for proficiency and conduct marks are appropriate? a. Excellent and average b. Excellent and outstanding c. Average and average d. Outstanding and outstanding
Item 30 Families who are prepared and equipped with the skills and tools to
successfully meet the challenges of the military lifestyle is the definition of a. family preparedness. b. family readiness. c. Marine Corps values. d. key family planning.
Item 31 Where should a Marine go to obtain information about financial planning?
a. The commanding officer b. The Marines platoon sergeant c. Several credit unions and banks d. Any financial institution
Continued on next page
![Page 307: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/307.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-9 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 32 Which of the following is a means of contacting the Marine in an emergency
while they are away on deployment? a. E-mail b. Letter mail c. MARS d. Local Red Cross chapter
Item 33 Who is responsible for a family care plan?
a. Individual Marine b. Platoon sergeant c. Platoon commander d. Company commander
Item 34 What type of planning should a Marine do before a deployment?
a. Legal b. Sensible c. Corrective d. Mandatory
Item 35 What is the key emotional factor when planning for a deployment?
a. Money problems b. Communication c. Shock d. Loneliness
Item 36 What is an example of how a pre-school child may be affected by a parent’s
absence due to a deployment? a. Misdirected anger b. Worry about family and finances c. Eating difficulties d. Low self-esteem
Continued on next page
![Page 308: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/308.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-10 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 37 Letters, e-mail, calling cards, MARS calls, and morale calls are all examples
of ________________ during a deployment. a. communication b. being aware c. staying up to date d. ways of beating boredom
Item 38 What percentage does the government pay for a Marine who volunteers for
the dental coverage? a. 90 b. 80 c. 75 d. 60
Item 39 The Navy Marine Corps Relief Society, American Red Cross, and the
Chaplain Corps are just three examples of a. services provided by Marine Corps community services. b. services within the key volunteer network. c. key family organizations. d. personal services.
Continued on next page
![Page 309: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/309.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-11 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 40 Who is authorized to approve emergency leave for more than 60 days?
a. The officer in charge b. Commandant of the Marine Corps c. Secretary of the Navy d. Platoon commander
Item 41 Which of the following documents are required for family members and
Marines if traveling and taking leave overseas?
a. Original orders b. ID card c. Birth certificate d. Passport
Item 42 When a Marine is deployed, his family can remain in base housing
a. only with written permission from the commanding officer. b. for the entire duration of the Marine’s deployment. c. if they pay 25 percent of the all amenities. d. only if the Marine is deployed for less than 90 days.
Item 43 What are some of the changes to anticipate when returning home from
deployment?
a. Less family time b. Over excitement c. Very little changes in routine d. Financial hardship
Item 44 Which of the following is one of the 10 commandments of a good
homecoming?
a. Thou shalt spend the extra deployment money on your family. b. Thou shalt relax and let the spouse take care of all after deployment
expenses. c. Thou shalt confess to a chaplain and not to a spouse. d. Thou shalt confess to a spouse and not to a chaplain.
Continued on next page
![Page 310: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/310.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-12 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 45 What are some helpful Web links for personal and family readiness and
deployment preparedness? a. Yahoo and Excite b. Google and Ask Jeeves c. United States Department of State and The United States Department of
Justice d. United Servicemen Organizations and The United States Marine Corps
Item 46 What does debt-to-income ratio measure?
a. Current expenditures against your net income b. Current obligations against your current income c. Projected expenses against your expected income d. Variable expenses against your gross income
Items 47 Through 49
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter to determine the debt-to-income ratio in column 2 in the correct sequence in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.
Column 1 Correct Sequence
Column 2 Debt-to-Income Ratio
___47. ___48. ___49.
a. Add the total minimum monthly payments on rent/mortgage, car, installment loans, and credit cards.
b. Multiply gross income by .37. c. Compare net income with
variable expenses. d. Find the difference between total
monthly payments and 37 percent of gross income.
Continued on next page
![Page 311: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/311.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-13 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Items 50 Through 52
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the budget term in column 2 that best fits the sample in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.
Column 1 Sample
Column 2 Budget Term
___50. Mortgage ___51. Salary minus taxes and
social security ___52. Food
a. Net income b. Fixed expenses c. Variable expenses d. Debt-to-income ratio
Items 53 Through 55
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the type of financial goal in column 2 that best matches the example in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.
Column 1 Example
Column 2 Financial Goal
___53. Establish credit, invest, and insure
___54. Buy new car, pay for college, afford retirement
___55. Get a job, create a budget, save money
a. Short-term b. Mid-term c. Long-term d. Temporary
Continued on next page
![Page 312: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/312.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-14 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 56 Through 58
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the credit term in column 2 that is defined in column 1. You may use the answers in column 2 only once.
Column 1 Definition
Column 2 Credit Term
___ 56. Original loan amount ___ 57. Percentage of the original
loan amount ___ 58. A charge for a financial
loan
a. Finance charge b. Interest c. Principle
Item 59 Credit lets you _______ now and _______ later and depends on your net
worth, income, and a. buy; pay; principle. b. save; pay; APR. c. buy; pay; credit rating. d. pay; save; credit line.
Item 60 Which of the following is not a disadvantage to having bad credit?
a. High interest rates b. Competitive loan rates c. Denied credit d. Bad credit report
Item 61 The best guideline for lowering monthly payments or reducing the number of
payments is to a. shop around for the best bargain. b. put as much down as you can afford. c. set strict credit limits for yourself. d. reduce your debt to by paying bills off ahead of time.
Continued on next page
![Page 313: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/313.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-15 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 62 What basic items must you have when you open a savings account?
a. Source of income, rate of savings, and social security number b. Social security number, interest rate, and minimum deposit c. Services you want, interest rate you expect, and social security number d. Name, address, social security number, and minimum deposit
Item 63 The traditional IRA requires you to have an adjusted gross income that does
not exceed _________ if you are single or _________ combined adjusted gross income for married couples. a. $24,000; $50,000 b. $33,000; $53,000 c. $50,000; $110,000 d. $50,000; $160,000
Item 64 Withdrawals from ___________ IRAs made prior to age 59½ are subject to
income tax plus a 10-percent penalty. a. traditional b. roth c. SEP d. roth and traditional
Item 65 Service group life insurance provides ________ life insurance to all active
duty personnel and ________ build cash value. a. whole; does not b. whole; does c. term; does not d. term; does
Continued on next page
![Page 314: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/314.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-16 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Items 66 Through 68
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the type of insurance from column 2 that is defined in column 1. You may use the answers in column 2 only once.
Column 1 Definition
Column 2 Type of Insurance
___ 66. Five-year term insurance policy available upon separation.
___ 67. Insurance that pays a lump sum or income to the policyholder that lives to a certain age or after a certain amount is paid.
___ 68. Insurance where the amount of insurance remains the same over each renewal period, but the cost increases at the start of each renewal.
a. VGLI b. Level term c. Adjustment d. Endowment
Continued on next page
![Page 315: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/315.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-17 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 69 When reviewing the criteria for choosing a life insurance policy, what are
three insurance rights that you should check before choosing a company policy? a. The company lets you correct mistaken personal information before they
turn you down, you can dispute their cancellation of insurance, and you must pay the premium for the time the policy is in force even if you cancel the policy.
b. The company is licensed in the state, you can cancel a policy any time, and you can ask how personal information will be used and can correct mistaken information.
c. The company is an A-rated company, is licensed in the state, and you read the policy before buying the insurance.
d. The company gives you guidelines about your responsibilities, you can cancel the policy any time, and you can correct any information that resulted in you being turned down for insurance.
Items 70 and 71 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the approach to determine
the amount of insurance you need in column 2 with the description that best matches it in column 1. You may use the answers in column 2 only once.
Column 1 Description
Column 2 Approach
___70. Multiplies current earnings by a factor of 5 times 12 months and adds the amount of unpaid home mortgage, plus $50,000 for each child living at home to determine amount of insurance needed
___71. Calculates future financial expenses of your family (car, house, and education) to determine amount of insurance needed
a. Multiple earnings b. Needs c. Common sense d. Multiple needs
Continued on next page
![Page 316: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/316.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-18 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 72 According to recent federal government statistics, over _____ percent of men
and women of all races are overweight or obese. a. 30 b. 32 c. 34 d. 36
Item 73 From the commander’s perspective, which of the following is not a benefit of
physical fitness? a. Less sick time b. Increased combat readiness c. More motivated marines d. Personal satisfaction
Item 74 According to Marine Corps Order 6100.12, every Marine must be
a. between the ages of 18 and 45 with a good positive outlook and be
physically fit. b. physically fit, regardless of age, grade, or duty assignment. c. physically fit with the exception of assignment to commands in high
elevations. d. physically fit between the ages of 17 and 45, no restrictions on grade or
duty assignment.
Item 75 Define physical fitness.
a. A state of good physical health. A physically fit body that is functioning
properly, and beyond that, functioning well. b. A state of reasonably good health. A physically fit body that is
functioning well. c. A well conditioned Marine whose body can adapt for variations in climate
and terrain. d. A Marine who has a combination of muscular endurance, strength, and
flexibility.
Continued on next page
![Page 317: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/317.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-19 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 76 What is the definition of flexibility?
a. A measure of the percentage of a person’s body mass that is lean tissue
and not body fat b. The ability to move a body part through a complete range of motion with
no pain c. The ability to move a body part with little or no pain involved d. The ability to move a body part through a complete range of motion
Item 77 What Marine Corps order states the objective, purpose, and conditioning
principles of the Marine Corps physical fitness program? a. MCO P5600.31G b. MCO P1610.7E c. MCO P1040.31H d. MCO P6100.12
Item 78 Which one of the following goals is a part of the Marine Corps Physical
Conditioning Program? a. Develop Marines who are capable of performing their duties anywhere. b. Develop Marines who are physically capable of performing their duties
anywhere. c. Contribute to the health and well being of every Marine through regular
exercise and health education. d. Contribute to the health of every Marine through regular exercise.
Item 79 Which of the following is not a basic nutrient?
a. Protein and carbohydrates b. Fat and vitamins c. Minerals and water d. Fiber and sugar
Continued on next page
![Page 318: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/318.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-20 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 80 Which nutrient serves primarily in a structure role?
a. Protein b. Carbohydrates c. Fat d. Vitamins
Item 81 Which nutrient is used primarily as an energy source?
a. Protein b. Carbohydrates c. Fat d. Vitamins
Item 82 Which nutrient is used primarily as a source of energy for the body?
a. Protein b. Carbohydrates c. Fat d. Vitamins
Item 83 Which nutrient, when found in excess, is converted to fat?
a. Protein b. Carbohydrates c. Fiber d. Minerals
Item 84 According to the food guide pyramid, how many servings from the milk,
yogurt, and cheese group should you receive each day? a. One to two b. Two to three c. Three to four d. Four to five
Continued on next page
![Page 319: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/319.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-21 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 85 What is the description for reference, MCO P5000.12D?
a. Pregnancy and Parenthood b. Personnel Reporting Instructions Manual c. Individual Records Administration Manual d. Separation and Retirement Manual
Item 86 What does MCO P1900.16F relate to?
a. Pregnancy and Parenthood b. Personnel Reporting Instructions Manual c. Individual Records Administration Manual d. Separation and Retirement Manual
Item 87 What is the description for reference, MCO P1070.12K?
a. Performance Evaluation System b. Marine Corps Physical Fitness Test and Body Composition Program
Manual c. Individual Records Administration Manual d. Pregnancy and Parenthood
Item 88 What is the recommended caloric intake for normal adults?
a. 1,000 b. 1,100 c. 1,200 d. 12,000
Item 89 In order to produce a 1- to 2-pound loss per week, you must reduce your daily
caloric intake by how many calories? a. 100 to 200 b. 250 to 750 c. 500 to 1,000 d. 1,000 to 2,000
Continued on next page
![Page 320: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/320.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-22 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 90 What is congestive heart failure a sign of?
a. Workout too heavy b. Starvation diet or fasting c. Workout too light d. Excessive upper body workout
Item 91 What are the four components of a weight loss program?
a. Moderate caloric reduction, aerobic exercise, strength training, and a low-
fat diet b. Major caloric reduction, aerobic exercise, strength training, and a fat-free
diet c. Caloric reduction, anaerobic exercise, isometric exercise, and a low-fat
diet d. Moderate caloric reduction, anaerobic exercise, strength training, and a
low-fat diet
Item 92 What is the primary determinant of your resting metabolic rate?
a. Total body fat b. Total caloric intake c. Body weight d. Total lean body mass
Item 93 What is the purpose of the Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP)?
a. Provides a process for Marines to ensure the accuracy and completeness
of performance records b. Gives Marines an opportunity to argue disagreements c. Provides insight on the Marine Corps Total Force System (MCTFS) d. Places performance records in the hands of the Reporting Senior (RS)
Continued on next page
![Page 321: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/321.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-23 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 94 Which of the following are references that contain information on
performance records? a. MCO P1070.12_Marine Corps Individual Records Administration
Manual (IRAM) b. MCO P1610.7_Performance Evaluation System (PES) c. MCO P1080.40_Marine Corps Total Force System Personnel Reporting
Instructions Manual (MCTFSPRIM) d. All of the above
Item 95 The purpose of the Master Brief Sheet (MBS) is to
a. provide statistical data of a Marine’s proficiency and conduct. b. provide key personal data and a summary of a Marine’s performance
evaluation record. c. provide a listing of a Marine’s fitness report from most recent to oldest. d. explain in detail all reviewing officer remarks.
Item 96 Which are two sections of the Master Brief Sheet?
a. Header Data and Fitness Report Listing b. Top and Bottom Section c. Header Data and Reviewing Officer Remarks d. Correcting Authority and Master Brief Sheet Listing
Item 97 Name, social security number, and rank description on the Master Brief Sheet
are corrected via a. CMC (MMPR). b. The Unit Diary. c. CMC (MA). d. Active CMC (MMOA).
Continued on next page
![Page 322: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/322.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-24 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Items 98 Through 102
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the description from column 2 that best describes the listing in column 1. The answers in column 2 may not be used more than once.
Column 1 Listing
Column 2 Description
___ 98. #RPTS@PROC ___ 99. Promotion ___ 100. Organization/School ___ 101. OCC ___ 102. REL VAL@PROC
a. Number of fitness reports written by RS on Marines of same grade as MRO as of time of processing report
b. RS promotion recommendation c. Command or unit to which the
Marine was assigned for duty d. Occasion for submitting report e. Relative value of the MRO
fitness report based on the RS’s rating history for Marines of the same grade as the MRO
Item 103 The OMPF provides a(n) ______ of the Marine’s ______ from entrance into
the Marine Corps until the present. a. analysis; statistics b. history; career c. snapshot; data d. report; production
Continued on next page
![Page 323: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/323.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-25 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Items 104 Through 108
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the description from column 2 that best describes the folder in column 1. The answers in column 2 may not be used more than once.
Column 1 Folder
Column 2 Description
___ 104. Service ___ 105. Commendatory/Derogatory ___ 106. Health/Dental ___ 107. Performance ___ 108. Field
a. Documents on civilian and military education, personal awards, and other material pertinent to selection, assignment, and retention decisions
b. Unless broken service, no records are held
c. Contract information, discharge documents, reserve documents, orders to active duty, and general administrative and service documents to compute service time for benefits program or retirement
d. Fitness reports and standard addendum pages for sergeants and above
e. Contains documents from previous OQR/SRBs if a Marine has periods of broken service
Item 109 Marines should request a copy of their OMPF for review and correction under
which circumstance? a. At least once every 2 years b. At least 12 months prior to the convening board c. At least 12 months prior to applying for programs such as the Warrant
Officer and Marine Corps Enlisted Commissioning Education Program d. All of the above
Continued on next page
![Page 324: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/324.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-26 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 110 The Performance Evaluation Section (PES) of the Personnel Management
Support Branch (MMSB) provides essential data to _________ CMC’s personnel management responsibilities. a. support b. enhance c. influence d. maximize
Item 111 Policy and Research Unit (MMSB-31) is responsible for fitness report policy,
research, correction, and accountability for all a. officers. b. active duty personnel. c. reserve Marines. d. enlisted Marines.
Item 112 Which of the following personnel are authorized to endorse fitness reports
that require administrative corrections? a. Reporting senior (RS) b. Administrative officer (AO) c. Reviewing officer (RO) d. a and b e. a and c
Item 113 To warrant a correction of a date gap, the date gap must be how many days
delinquent? a. 30 or more b. 30 or less c. 31 or longer d. 31 or less
Continued on next page
![Page 325: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/325.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-27 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 114 Which of the following are components of the basic individual record (BIR)?
a. Foreign language, record status, and date of birth b. Name, SSN, EAS, and record status c. SSN, marital status, and current rifle qualification d. Army radio code, service spouse’s SSN, and name
Item 115 Which of the following are components of the Basic Training Record (BTR)?
a. PFT, service schools code/year, and dependent certification code b. BST/EST, security clearance, citizenship, and religion c. T/O number/line number, date of birth, and security investigation/type d. Current pistol qualification, local schools, and PFT
Item 116 What are the occasions for conducting an audit of the BIR and BTR?
a. A Marine retires b. An annual inspection c. A Marine joins a unit and triennially d. A Marine reenlists
Item 117 To report additions, deletions, and change missing or erroneous data on the
BIR or BTR, ______________ entries are made. a. unit diary b. historical data c. administrative d. central master file
Continued on next page
![Page 326: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/326.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-28 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 118 Which type of information is contained in a file?
a. Written correspondence b. Electronic correspondence c. Verbal correspondence d. Televised correspondence
Item 119 What is the Kraft folder mainly used for?
a. Mailing correspondence b. Displaying correspondence c. Filing correspondence d. Routing correspondence
Item 120 How many major subject groups are in the Navy’s SSIC system?
a. 10 b. 12 c. 13 d. 20
Item 121 What document is used to revise the department of the Navy SSICs and
department of the Navy file maintenance procedures? a. SECNAVINST 5210.11D b. SECNAVINST 5212.5 c. SECNAVINST 5215.1 d. SECNAVINST 5216.5
Continued on next page
![Page 327: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/327.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-29 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Items 122 Through 126
Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the SSIC designator from column 2 that best describes the general category in column 1. The answers in column 2 may not be used more than once.
Column 1 General Category
Column 2 SSIC Designator
___ 122. Telecommunications ___ 123. Logistics ___ 124. Medicine and Dentistry ___ 125. Ordnance Material ___ 126. Civilian Personnel
a. 4000 to 4999 b. 6000 to 6999 c. 2000 to 2999 d. 12000 to 12999 e. 8000 to 8999
Item 127 Which task is accomplished through directives?
a. Modifies authority and changes responsibility b. Regulates another directive c. Directs courses of action or conduct d. Conducts training
Item 128 Which directive is used to publish material that is either primarily informative
or otherwise directive in nature? a. Orders b. Bulletins c. Letters d. Messages
Continued on next page
![Page 328: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/328.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-30 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 129 Which type of order does the letter “P” preceding the SSIC identify?
a. Letter b. ALMAR c. 5-paragraph d. Manual
Item 130 What are communications used to transmit written ideas and messages called?
a. Recording b. Photo analysis c. Correspondence d. Video
Item 131 What publication is used to prescribe uniform standards for management and
preparation of correspondence? a. SECNAVINST 5216.5 b. MCO 5215 c. SECNAVINST 5210.11 d. MCO 5600.48
Item 132 Use automated office equipment to increase efficiency, is an example of
guidelines for a. using office equipment. b. writing correspondence. c. sending messages. d. improving employer/employee relations.
Continued on next page
![Page 329: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/329.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-31 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 133 Which part of a paragraph restates the main idea of the paragraph using
different words? a. Supporting details b. Topic sentence c. Subject sentence d. Closing sentence
Item 134 Which line of a standard letter consists of a sentence fragment that tells
readers what the letter is about? a. Enclosure b. Reference c. Subject d. Text
Item 135 The distribution block of a multiple-address letter is used when you have
a. more than four addressees. b. addressees from separate commands. c. less than four addressees. d. a group title of unknown distribution.
Item 136 Which memorandum format is used when direct liaison with individuals
outside the command is authorized? a. Plain-paper b. From-To c. Letterhead d. Memorandum For
Continued on next page
![Page 330: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/330.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-32 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 137 What is a stand-alone document that presents the essential elements of a
subject? a. Business letter b. Discussion paper c. Standard letter d. Point paper
Item 138 Which type of publication contains a narrower focus detailing tactics,
techniques, and procedures used in the prosecution of war and other assigned tasks? a. MCWP b. MCDP c. JMEM d. MCRP
Item 139 Which Internet Web site lists multi-service publications?
a. www.doctrine.usmc.mil b. www.dtic.mil/doctrine c. www.dtic.mil/alsa d. www.nwdc.navy.smil.mil
Item 140 What online interactive system is used to request and distribute publications?
a. MCAIS b. MCPDS c. MCLB d. MCU
Continued on next page
![Page 331: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/331.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-33 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 141 What information is required when requesting a publication?
a. Price per copy b. Delivery date c. Source document d. Shipping preference
Item 142 Managing and controlling the organization’s classified material is a function
of the a. operations section. b. security manager. c. executive officer. d. directives control point.
Item 143 What is the principle of critical thinking?
a. The ability to combine observations, experiences, and theoretical
solutions into a practical problem b. The ability to combine observations and experiences into a practical
problem c. Defining the objective then revising it for clarity d. Dividing the objective into components then revising it for clarity
Item 144 Which of the following is not a principle of critical thinking?
a. Define the objective b. Divide the objective into components c. Gather data d. Clarity
Continued on next page
![Page 332: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/332.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-34 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 145 What are inferences?
a. Conclusions based on evidence, environmental factors, and/or experience
if it is applicable to the objective b. Conclusions based on evidence and experience if it is applicable to the
objective c. Conclusions based on evidence and environmental factors that are
applicable to the objective d. Assumptions based on evidence and environmental factors that are
applicable to the objective
Item 146 What are implications?
a. An implied resolution b. An implication occurs when a claim or truth follows two or more
premises, which are conclusions drawn from experience or application c. A claim drawn from conclusions d. A claim or conclusion that is drawn from an implied resolution,
experience, or an application
Item 147 What are consequences?
a. The ability to evaluate an objective or analyze a problem b. The outcome from evaluating an objective or a problem c. Results from an implication from certain circumstances d. Results from an action or condition
Item 148 Which of the following is not a component of preparation in reference to
critical thinking? a. Reading b. Listening c. Discussing d. Reworking
Continued on next page
![Page 333: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/333.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-35 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 149 What is chunking?
a. A questioning technique that will break each paragraph down to a single
sentence b. The removal of unnecessary adverbs and conjunctions c. The removal of unnecessary adverbs only d. A questioning technique that will break the topic into smaller pieces
Item 150 Define writing purpose.
a. The goal or what the document is supposed to accomplish b. To mind map a document c. The goal of the thesis alone d. The information the writer is trying to relay to the reader in the simpliest
form
Item 151 What is brevity?
a. The effective use of conjunctions and adverbs within a sentence b. Removing entire sentences from a document just to make the paragraph
shorter c. The minimum number of words to project the maximum idea or thought
of the writer d. The minimum number of words used to simplify the sentence to an eighth
grade reading level
![Page 334: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/334.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-36 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers The table below lists the answers to the review lesson examination items. If
you have questions about these items, refer to the reference page of the course text.
Item Number Answer Reference
1 a 1-4 2 d 1-4 3 a 1-6 4 b 1-6 5 c 1-5 6 d 1-6 7 e 1-6 8 b 1-7 9 a 1-7
10 d 1-9 11 b 1-9 12 a 1-14 13 d 1-15 14 c 1-15 15 b 1-17 16 d 1-18 17 a 1-20 18 a 2-5 19 c 2-6 20 d 2-6 21 a 2-6 22 b 2-7 23 c 2-7 24 a 2-7 25 d 2-7 26 a 2-12 27 c 2-14 28 b 2-13, 2-15 29 d 2-13, 2-16 30 b 3-5 31 c 3-6
Continued on next page
![Page 335: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/335.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-37 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers, continued
Item Number Answer Reference
32 d 3-11 33 a 3-16 34 a 3-17 35 d 3-24 36 c 3-29 37 a 3-37 38 d 3-42 39 c 3-46 40 b 3-53 41 d 3-54 42 b 3-56 43 a 3-68 44 c 3-71 45 d 3-72 46 b 4-4 47 b 4-4 48 a 4-4 49 d 4-4 50 b 4-7 51 a 4-7 52 c 4-7 53 b 4-14 54 c 4-15 55 a 4-14 56 c 4-19 57 a 4-19 58 b 4-19 59 c 4-18 60 b 4-21 61 b 4-22 62 d 4-30 63 b 4-32
Continued on next page
![Page 336: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/336.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-38 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers, continued
Item Number Answer Reference
64 a 4-35 65 c 4-41 66 a 4-42 67 d 4-44 68 b 4-43 69 b 4-46 70 a 4-48 71 c 4-58 72 a 5-4 73 d 5-6 74 b 5-4 75 a 5-10 76 b 5-10 77 d 5-4 78 d 5-12 79 d 5-19 80 a 5-19 81 b 5-19 82 c 5-20 83 a 5-19 84 b 5-29 85 a 5-35 86 d 5-35 87 c 5-35 88 c 5-36 89 c 5-37 90 b 5-36 91 a 5-37 92 d 5-37 93 a 6-5 94 d 6-7 95 b 6-8 96 a 6-8
Continued on next page
![Page 337: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/337.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-39 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers, continued
Item Number Answer Reference
97 b 6-8 98 a 6-11 99 b 6-11 100 c 6-10 101 d 6-10 102 e 6-11 103 b 6-12 104 c 6-12 105 a 6-12 106 b 6-12 107 d 6-12 108 e 6-12 109 d 6-13 110 a 6-20 111 b 6-20 112 e 6-22 113 c 6-24 114 b 6-31 115 d 6-31 116 c 6-32 117 a 6-33 118 a 7-4 119 c 7-4 120 c 7-6 121 a 7-6 122 c 7-7 123 a 7-8 124 b 7-8 125 e 7-9 126 d 7-10 127 c 7-13 128 b 7-14 129 d 7-14
Continued on next page
![Page 338: Leadership and Administration](https://reader034.vdocuments.us/reader034/viewer/2022042623/5467fb7aaf79596e458b56a4/html5/thumbnails/338.jpg)
MCI Course 8101 R-40 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers, continued
Item Number Answer Reference
130 c 7-22 131 a 7-22 132 b 7-22 133 d 7-23 134 c 7-27 135 a 7-34 136 c 7-41 137 d 7-45 138 a 7-58 139 c 7-61 140 b 7-62 141 c 7-63 142 d 7-64 143 a 8-4 144 d 8-6 145 a 8-9 146 b 8-9 147 d 8-9 148 d 8-12 149 d 8-14 150 a 8-26 151 c 8-48